1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
18 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
20 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
21 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
22 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
23 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
25 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
29 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
30 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
32 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
33 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
35 % for customized page headers/footers
36 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
38 % change header rule width
39 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
41 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
42 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
43 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
45 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
47 % the following added in Bahasa Indonesia Version
48 % to follow the most common style (centered chapters) in Indonesia
49 \addtokomafont{chapterentry}{\centering}
50 \addtokomafont{chapter}{\centering}
52 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
53 \use_default_options false
58 \maintain_unincluded_children false
60 \language_package default
63 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
64 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
65 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
66 \font_math "auto" "auto"
67 \font_default_family default
68 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_sf_scale 100 100
72 \font_tt_scale 100 100
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "Petunjuk Penggunaan LyX"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 0
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 0
105 \use_package stmaryrd 0
106 \use_package undertilde 0
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
116 \notefontcolor #0000ff
133 \paragraph_separation indent
134 \paragraph_indentation default
135 \quotes_language english
138 \paperpagestyle default
139 \tracking_changes false
140 \output_changes false
149 Petunjuk Penggunaan \SpecialChar LyX
154 oleh Tim \SpecialChar LyX
159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
161 Petunjuk dalam Bahasa Indonesia ini disunting oleh
166 Apabila anda mempunyai komentar atau menemukan kesalahan yang perlu dikoreksi,
167 silakan kirim komentar ke mailing list \SpecialChar LyX
171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
173 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
195 \begin_inset Note Note
198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
199 Versi PDF terkini dapat diperoleh disini:
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
206 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
214 \begin_layout Standard
215 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
216 LatexCommand tableofcontents
223 \begin_layout Chapter
227 \begin_layout Section
228 Apakah \SpecialChar LyX
232 \begin_layout Standard
234 adalah suatu sistem pengaturan dokumen yang digunakan untuk menyiapkan
235 manuskrip makalah, buku, surat bisnis, proposal, juga dapat digunakan untuk
239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
248 menggunakan paradigma bahasa perubahan sebagai inti dari gaya penyuntingan,
249 yaitu apabila anda menulis judul bab, maka anda hanya perlu menandainya
251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
258 , tidak perlu menyatakan
259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
262 Huruf Tebal, ukuran 17
263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
266 pt, rata kiri, jarak ke baris berikutnya 5
267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
276 yang akan mengatur semuanya itu.
277 Anda hanya perlu memikirkan tentang isi dan konsep, bukan bagaimana pengaturan
281 \begin_layout Standard
282 Filosopi ini dijelaskan pada buku panduan
283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
295 Apabila belum membacanya, sangat disarankan anda membacanya terlebih dahulu
296 sebelum melanjutkan mempelajari buku panduan ini.
299 \begin_layout Standard
301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
312 , selain menjelaskan tentang filosofi \SpecialChar LyX
313 , juga menjelaskan tentang format
314 penulisan yang digunakan di semua buku panduan.
315 Oleh karena itu anda perlu meluangkan waktu untuk membacanya terlebih dahulu.
316 Buku panduan lain yang disarankan dipelajari sebelum membaca buku panduan
317 ini adalah buku panduan
318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
332 \begin_layout Section
333 Bagaimana Tampilan \SpecialChar LyX
337 \begin_layout Standard
338 Seperti umumnya aplikasi program lain, \SpecialChar LyX
339 mempunyai kotak menu utama di bagian
341 Dibagian bawahnya ada kotak bantuan yang berisi satu kotak pilihan serta
342 berbagai tombol bantuan.
343 Selain itu, ada gulungan vertikal dan area kerja utama untuk menyunting
347 \begin_layout Standard
348 Ada satu hal yang perlu anda ketahui, anda tidak akan menemukan gulungan
350 Hal ini bukanlah karena kutu program atau fitur yang terlupakan, tetapi
351 merupakan kesengajaan.
352 Teks yang ditulis dalam area kerja \SpecialChar LyX
353 akan selalu diteruskan di baris bawahnya
354 apabila melewati batas jendela kerja.
355 Oleh karena itu, \SpecialChar LyX
356 tidak memerlukan gulungan horisontal, cukup menggunakan
358 Mungkin ada tiga alasan mengapa anda masih memerlukan gulungan horisontal.
359 Yang pertama adalah apabila anda mempunyai gambar yang berukuran besar.
360 Untuk mengatasi hal ini, yang anda perlu lakukan adalah mengatur skala
361 gambar di \SpecialChar LyX
362 agar bisa ditampilan seluruhnya di area kerja \SpecialChar LyX
364 Alasan yang kedua dan ketiga adalah berkaitan dengan tabel dan persamaan
365 yang melebihi area kerja.
366 Untuk tabel, anda bisa menggunakan tombol panah untuk menggeser kursor
367 dalam tabel pada arah horisontal.
368 Namun demikian, hal ini belum dapat dilakukan untuk persamaan yang panjang
369 dan melebihi area kerja.
372 \begin_layout Standard
373 Penjelasan ringkas tentang semua menu \SpecialChar LyX
374 serta tombol bantuan yang ada, silahkan
380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
382 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
387 Hampir semua menu dapat dipahami dengan sendirinya dari nama menu.
388 Namun demikian anda dapat memperoleh penjelasan lanjut pada sub-bab dalam
394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
396 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
404 \begin_layout Section
408 \begin_layout Standard
409 Bantuan yang disediakan adalah dalam bentuk buku panduan \SpecialChar LyX
415 buku panduan dalam \SpecialChar LyX
417 Caranya sangat mudah, dari menu
421 , kemudian pilihlah buku panduan yang ingin anda baca.
424 \begin_layout Section
425 Pengaturan \SpecialChar LyX
427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
429 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
436 \begin_layout Standard
437 Ada beberapa fitur \SpecialChar LyX
438 dapat diatur dari dalam \SpecialChar LyX
439 , tanpa melakukan perubahan
440 atau menyunting secara langsung pada berkas konfigurasinya.
442 mampu memeriksa sistem anda untuk melihat perangkat lunak, class dokumen
444 , serta paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
446 Dengan kemampuan ini, \SpecialChar LyX
447 menggunakannya untuk menentukan pengaturan bawaan
453 \begin_inset Index idx
456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
463 Walaupun pengaturan konfigurasi bawaan sudah dilakukan ketika proses instalasi
465 , anda masih mempunyai keleluasaan untuk menambah program tambahan secara
466 lokal, misalnya \SpecialChar LaTeX
467 class, yang sebelumnya belum dikenal oleh \SpecialChar LyX
469 Untuk memaksa \SpecialChar LyX
470 untuk memeriksa ulang sistem anda, maka anda perlu menggunakan
473 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
477 \begin_inset Index idx
480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
481 Konfigurasi Ulang \SpecialChar LyX
488 Setelah proses konfigurasi ulang, anda harus menjalankan ulang \SpecialChar LyX
490 n semua perubahan diterapkan dalam \SpecialChar LyX
494 \begin_layout Section
495 Pengaturan \SpecialChar LaTeX
497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
499 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
506 \begin_layout Standard
507 Anda dapat menyunting dokumen dalam \SpecialChar LyX
508 tanpa instalasi \SpecialChar LaTeX
509 , namun demikian anda
510 tidak akan bisa melihat atau mebuat PDF atau mencetak dokumen tanpa \SpecialChar LaTeX
512 Apabila dokumen anda menggunakan DocBook, maka anda akan dapat menghasilkan
513 PDF atau yang setara, selain itu semua dokumen dalam DocBook akan mempunyai
514 keluaran sebagai plain text atau XHTML.
517 \begin_layout Standard
518 Beberapa class dokumen menggunakan kombinasi class \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 atau DocBook atau paket
522 Anda dapat menggunakan class dokumen tersebut walaupun anda tidak memiliki
523 berkas yang seharusnya sudah dipasang.
524 Tentu saja anda tidak dapat melihat hasil keluaran tanpa semua berkas terpasang
528 \begin_layout Standard
529 Semua paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 yang sudah dideteksi ada dalam sistem anda dapat dilihat melalui
533 Bantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
552 Apabila ada paket-paket yang belum terpasang, anda perlu melakukan instalasi
553 paket kemudian konfigurasi ulang (menu
555 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
563 \begin_inset Note Note
566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
567 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
568 Code box prevent that the term
569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
577 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
578 More about \SpecialChar TeX
579 Code is described in section
584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
586 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
590 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
591 is explained in section
596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
598 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
608 \begin_inset Index idx
611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
612 Konfigurasi Ulang \SpecialChar LyX
618 Informasi tentang bagaimana melakukan instalasi tambahan paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
620 lihat sub-bab 5.1 dari buku panduan
622 Perubahan dan Pengaturan
627 \begin_layout Chapter
628 Bagaimana Menggunakan \SpecialChar LyX
632 \begin_layout Section
633 Dasar Penggunaan Berkas
634 \begin_inset Index idx
637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
646 \begin_layout Standard
647 Semua penggunaan berkas dapat dimulai dari menu
651 serta ada di kotak bantuan dalam bentuk ikon tombol bantuan.
652 Beberapa menu yang berkaitan dengan berkas adalah:
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 \begin_layout Itemize
681 \begin_layout Itemize
697 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
715 \begin_layout Itemize
733 \begin_layout Itemize
743 \begin_layout Itemize
753 \begin_layout Itemize
759 \begin_layout Itemize
765 \begin_layout Itemize
771 \begin_layout Standard
772 Secara umum, hampir semua operasi berkas mirip dengan yang ada di pengolah
774 Hanya saja di \SpecialChar LyX
775 ada sedikit perbedaan.
776 Apabila membuka berkas baru dari The
778 Berkas\SpecialChar menuseparator
780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
789 bukan hanya menuntun anda untuk memberi nama berkas tetapi juga memilih
790 templet yang akan anda gunakan.
791 Dengan memilih templet secara otomatis akan mengatur fitur utama tataletak
792 dokumen, sedangkan fitur lainnya dapat anda atur sendiri.
793 Templet mungkin menggunakan kelas dokumen tertentu (lihat subbab
798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
800 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
807 \begin_layout Standard
824 sangat berguna apabila anda bersama teman-teman anda menyunting berkas
829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
830 Apabila anda akan melakukan hal ini, anda perlu mempelajari fitur Kontrol
831 Versi yang ditulis di buku panduan
835 \SpecialChar endofsentence
850 akan memuat ulang dokumen dari cakra.
851 Anda dapat menggunakan operasi
859 untuk mengabaikan perubahan yang sudah anda lakukan dan mengembalikan ke
860 berkas terakhir yang anda simpan.
861 Dengan operasi berkas
869 anda dapat mendaftarkan catatan perubahan pada dokumen sehingga orang lain
870 akan dapat mengenali perubahan yang telah anda lakukan.
873 \begin_layout Section
874 Dasar Fitur Penyuntingan
875 \begin_inset Index idx
878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
887 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
894 \begin_layout Standard
895 Seperti pengolah kata modern lainnya, operasi penyuntingan dengan potong
896 dan tempel dalam \SpecialChar LyX
897 dapat dipraktekkan untuk teks, berupa karakter, kata,
898 maupun keseluruhan halaman atau bahkan lebih dari satu halaman.
899 Pada empat subbab berikut akan menjelaskan fitur penyuntingan yang ada
900 dalam \SpecialChar LyX
901 dan bagaimana memanfaatkannya.
902 Kita akan memulai dari potong dan tempel.
905 \begin_layout Standard
906 Seperti yang anda perkirakan, menu
910 dan kotak bantuan standar menyediakan perintah potong dan tempelkan serta
911 fitur suntingan lainnya.
912 Beberapa perintah suntingan perlu pembahasan khusus sehingga dikelompokkan
913 dalam pembahasan subbab berikutnya.
914 Perintah suntingan utama adalah:
917 \begin_layout Itemize
931 \begin_layout Itemize
945 \begin_layout Itemize
959 \begin_layout Itemize
963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
973 \begin_layout Itemize
977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
983 \begin_layout Itemize
987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
999 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1005 \begin_layout Standard
1006 Tiga perintah suntingan yang pertama dapat dipahami dari nama perintahnya
1008 Hanya ada beberapa catatan: apabila anda memilih dan menandai teks di dokumen
1009 anda, maka secara otomatis akan tersimpam di papan klip.
1018 juga berfungsi sebagai perintah
1023 Selain itu yang paling penting, jika anda memilih dan menandai teks, harap
1024 hati-hati: jika anda menekan salah satu tombol, maka \SpecialChar LyX
1026 yang anda pilih tadi dan mengganti dengan dengan huruf atau karakter yang
1028 Untuk mengembalikannya, anda perlu melakukan perintah
1032 agar teks dikembalikan seperti semula.
1035 \begin_layout Standard
1036 \begin_inset Index idx
1039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1045 Anda dapat dapat menyalin teks di \SpecialChar LyX
1046 juga dari program lainnya menggunakan
1065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1080 akan menampilkan daftar teks yang terakhir anda tempelkan.
1083 \begin_layout Standard
1086 \SpecialChar menuseparator
1088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1101 akan menyisipkan teks yang tersimpan di papan klip sedemikian sehingga teks
1102 yang disisipkan dalam
1107 Paragraf baru akan dimulai apabila ada baris kosong.
1112 , teks disisipkan sebagai paragraf baru, dimana setiap ganti baris menjadi
1116 \begin_layout Standard
1117 \begin_inset Index idx
1120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1127 \begin_inset Index idx
1130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1138 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1157 akan membuka jendela dialog
1160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1170 Apabila anda sudah menemukan kata atau ekspresi yang anda cari, \SpecialChar LyX
1173 Dengan menekan tombol
1177 , kata yang ditemukan tadi akan digantikan dengan teks yang ada di area
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1191 Anda bisa meneruskan pencarian dengan menekan tombol Berikutnya.
1192 Jika anda menekan tombol
1197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1204 maka semua kata yang ada di dokumen akan diganti seketika secara otomatis.
1208 \begin_layout Standard
1209 Apabila anda ingin mempertimbangkan huruf besar/kecil, anda perlu menggunakan
1212 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1252 anda bisa mengatur pencarian yang anda inginkan.
1253 Apabila anda mengkatifkan pilihan
1256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1265 , maka pencarian kata
1266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1298 akan memaksa \SpecialChar LyX
1299 hanya mencari kata tersebut, misalnya pencarian
1300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1311 tidak akan menemukan
1312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1327 offers also an advanced
1330 \begin_inset space ~
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1339 feature that is described in sec.
1340 \begin_inset space ~
1344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1346 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1353 \begin_layout Standard
1354 Beberapa sisipan tambahan berformat, seperti nota, ambangan, dll., dapat
1356 Maknanya apabila tanda sisipan dihilangkan, maka isinya akan berubah menjadi
1358 Cara menguraikan sisipan tambahan adalah dengan meletakkan kursor di lokasi
1359 paling depan dalam kotak sisipan kemudian menekan tombol ketik
1363 atau meletakkan kursor di bagian akhir dalam kotak sisipan kemudian menekan
1371 \begin_layout Standard
1374 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1377 arg "inset-select-all"
1383 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1386 selects the whole document.
1389 \begin_layout Section
1390 Batalkan dan Kembalikan
1391 \begin_inset Index idx
1394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1401 \begin_inset Index idx
1404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1413 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1420 \begin_layout Standard
1421 Jika anda membuat kesalahan anda dapat dengan mudah membatalkannya.
1422 Anda perlu ke menu Suntingan
1424 \SpecialChar menuseparator
1427 atau dari tombol bantuan
1437 untuk membatalkan apa yang baru saja anda lakukan.
1439 mempunyai kemampunyan menyimpan dalam kapasitas yang besar untuk membatalkan/m
1441 Saat ini mekanisme simpanan maksimum adalah sampai 100
1442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1446 Apabila secara tidak sengaja anda melakukan proses pembatalan yang terlebih,
1447 anda bisa mengembalikannya dari menu
1449 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1452 atau dengan menekan tombol
1461 \begin_layout Standard
1462 Apabila anda mengembalikan perubahan sampai ke kondisi dokumen saat terakhir
1463 disimpan, status dokumen
1464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1471 tidak akan menjadi normal kembali seperti tidak ada perubahan.
1472 Hal ini karena anda sebenarnya melakukan perubahan pada dokumen.
1475 \begin_layout Standard
1484 dapat dilakukan untuk apa saja di \SpecialChar LyX
1486 Namun demikian proses
1494 pada teks tidak dilakukan untuk setiap karakter, tetapi berlaku untuk kumpulan
1498 \begin_layout Section
1500 \begin_inset Index idx
1503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1512 \begin_layout Standard
1513 Berikut ini adalah dasar pengunaan tetikus.
1516 \begin_layout Enumerate
1518 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1525 \begin_layout Itemize
1530 sekali di daerah jendela kerja \SpecialChar LyX
1532 Kursor akan mengikuti dan berkedip tepat di tempat anda menekan tombol
1537 \begin_layout Enumerate
1538 Memilih dan Menandai Teks
1539 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1546 \begin_layout Itemize
1551 kemudian seret tetikus.
1553 akan menandai teks mulai dari awal kursor sebelum diseret sampai ke tempat
1554 posisi kursor setelah diseret.
1557 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1560 untuk membuat salinan teks dalam simpanan \SpecialChar LyX
1564 \begin_layout Itemize
1565 Pindahkan kursor ke tempat lain kemudian tempelkan teks yang disimpan ke
1566 lokasi baru, menggunakan
1568 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1575 \begin_layout Enumerate
1576 Sisipan Tambahan (Catatan kaki, Nota, Ambangan, etc.)
1577 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1584 \begin_layout Standard
1589 pada sisipan tambahan untuk melihat propertinya.
1590 Anda perlu membaca pada bab tertentu di buku panduan ini untuk penjelasan
1595 \begin_layout Section
1597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1599 name "sec:Navigating"
1604 \begin_inset Index idx
1607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1616 \begin_layout Standard
1620 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1623 \begin_layout Itemize
1630 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1631 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1634 \begin_layout Itemize
1637 The `Outline', which is accessed either by the menu
1639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
1642 or by the toolbar button
1645 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1651 \begin_layout Itemize
1654 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1656 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1659 and use the same menu to return to them.
1660 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1663 \begin_layout Standard
1669 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1674 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1675 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1679 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1680 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1681 your last editing position.
1684 \begin_layout Subsection
1690 \begin_layout Standard
1693 The Outline was known in earlier versions of \SpecialChar LyX
1695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1702 , since its original purpose was to display the document's table of contents.
1703 The Outline has become much more powerful now, however.
1704 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1705 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1706 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1709 LatexCommand formatted
1710 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1714 ), or notes, or citations (see
1715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1716 LatexCommand formatted
1717 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1722 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1724 The Outline has become much more powerful now, however.
1725 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1726 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1727 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1730 LatexCommand formatted
1731 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1735 ), or notes, or of citations (see
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1737 LatexCommand formatted
1738 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1743 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1747 \begin_layout Standard
1750 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline will in many cases open a context
1751 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1752 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1753 dialog and to modify the citation.
1754 Right-clicking a change will allow you to accept or reject it.
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1761 The `Filter' field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1763 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1764 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1772 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1775 \begin_layout Standard
1778 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1779 you further to control the display.
1784 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1785 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1790 option keeps it in the current view state.
1791 Keeping means that when you have e.
1792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1796 \begin_inset space \space{}
1799 the subsections of section
1800 \begin_inset space ~
1803 2 and 4 shown and click on section
1804 \begin_inset space ~
1807 3, the subsections of section
1808 \begin_inset space ~
1811 2 and 4 will still be shown.
1816 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1817 \begin_inset space ~
1821 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1831 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1834 \begin_layout Standard
1843 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1844 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1858 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1859 So, for example, you can move section
1860 \begin_inset space ~
1864 \begin_inset space ~
1867 2.4 or after section
1868 \begin_inset space ~
1873 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1886 (or the corresponding key bindings
1894 ) you can change the level of sections.
1895 So you can for example make section
1896 \begin_inset space ~
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1910 \begin_layout Section
1911 Masukan / Melengkapi Kata
1912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1914 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1919 \begin_inset Index idx
1922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1929 \begin_inset Index idx
1932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1963 \begin_layout Standard
1965 menyediakan data kata-kata untuk mempercepat proses penyuntingan dari hasil
1966 memindai kata-kata dalam dokumen yang sedang dibuka.
1967 Semua kata-kata yang ada dalam dokumen disimpan dalam basis data untuk
1968 digunakan melengkapi kata saat proses penyuntingan.
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1972 Pengaturan bawaan \SpecialChar LyX
1973 untuk melengkapi kata adalah dalam bentuk yang paling
1974 sederhana yaitu menggunakan tampilan kursor segitiga sebagai tanda bahwa
1975 sudah ada kata tersedia.
1976 Anda tinggal menggunakan tombol
1980 untuk melengkapi kata.
1981 Apabila ada beberapa pilihan kata tersedia, jendela kecil akan muncul dan
1982 menampilkan kata-kata tersebut.
1983 Anda dapat memilih dengan menggunakan tetikus atau tombol panah, kemudian
1984 menetapkan pilihan dengan menekan tombol
1992 \begin_layout Standard
1993 Untuk menghilangkan tanda melengkapi segitiga, anda perlu mengubah pengaturan
1996 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1999 kemudian dari seksi Penyuntingan
2001 \SpecialChar menuseparator
2003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2008 anda perlu melepaskan pilihan
2013 Sedangkan pengaturan
2015 Melengkapi kata otomatis pada baris
2017 , pilihan kata akan ditampilkan pada baris dibelakang posisi kursor.
2018 Untuk menerima saran kata yang muncul pada baris, anda cukup menekan tombol
2024 Apabila menggunakan pengaturan
2026 Menampilkan jendela pilihan otomatis
2028 , maka jendela pilihan kata akan selalu ditampilkan.
2030 mempunyai berbagai pengaturan melengkapi kata untuk yang sudah mahir.
2031 Pengaturan lanjut akan dapat ditemui di subbab.
2032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2038 reference "subsec:Input-Completion-Appendix"
2045 \begin_layout Section
2046 Gabungan tombol ketik
2047 \begin_inset Index idx
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 Gabungan tombol ketik
2057 \begin_inset Index idx
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2072 Gabungan tombol ketik
2076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2089 \begin_inset Index idx
2092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2123 \begin_layout Standard
2124 Ada dua peta utama untuk gabungan tombol ketik: CUA dan Emacs.
2125 Bawaan \SpecialChar LyX
2129 \begin_layout Standard
2130 Beberapa tombol ketik, seperti
2133 \begin_inset space ~
2141 \begin_inset space ~
2162 , sudah dapat berfungsi seperti yang anda harapkan.
2163 Namun demikian beberapa tombol ketik mungkin perlu dipahami fungsinya.
2166 \begin_layout Labeling
2167 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2171 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2172 LatexCommand nomenclature
2174 description "Tombol ketik Tabulator"
2180 LyC tidak memfungsikan tombol ini sebagai hentian tab.
2181 Apabila anda belum memahaminya anda silahkan sekarang membaca terlebih
2183 \begin_inset space ~
2187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2189 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2196 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2201 \begin_inset space ~
2205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2207 reference "subsec:Lists"
2213 Apabila anda masih merasa belum mengerti juga, mungkin anda perlu membaca
2221 \begin_layout Labeling
2222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2226 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2227 LatexCommand nomenclature
2229 description "Tombol ketik Escape"
2235 Tombol ini digunakan sebagai
2236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2243 Secara umum tombol ini memang digunakan untuk membatalkan penyuntingan.
2244 Buku petunjuk ini juga akan membahas lebih terperinci tentang pemanfaatannya.
2247 \begin_layout Labeling
2248 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2254 \begin_inset space ~
2258 \begin_inset space ~
2269 akan memindahkan kursor ke bagian awal dari baris dan tombol
2273 memindah kursor ke bagian akhir baris.
2274 Jika anda menggunakan peta Emacs,
2278 memindah ke bagian awal berkas sementara
2282 memindah kursor ke bagian akhir berkas.
2285 \begin_layout Standard
2286 Ada tiga tombol ketik pengubah:
2289 \begin_layout Labeling
2290 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2295 (Diseluruh buku petunjuk Disingkat dengan
2296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2308 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2309 LatexCommand nomenclature
2311 description "Tombol ketik Control"
2315 ) Tombol ini mempunyai beberapa fungsi, tergantung dengan tombol ketik lain
2316 yang dikombinasikan:
2317 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2324 \begin_layout Itemize
2333 , akan menghapus seluruh kata bukan hanya satu karakter.
2336 \begin_layout Itemize
2345 , akan menggerakkan kursor satu kata kekiri atau kekanan.
2348 \begin_layout Itemize
2357 , akan memindah kursor ke bagian awal dokumen atau ke bagian akhir dokumen.
2361 \begin_layout Labeling
2362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2367 (Dalam buku petunjuk disebut dengan
2368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2380 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2381 LatexCommand nomenclature
2383 description "Tombol ketik Shift"
2387 ) Tombol ini digunakan untuk menandai teks dengan tombol panah, dimulai
2388 dari posisi awal ke sampai berhenti menggerakkan.
2391 \begin_layout Labeling
2392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2397 (Dalam buku petunjuk disebut dengan
2398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2410 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2411 LatexCommand nomenclature
2413 description "Tombol ketik Alt atau tombol ketik Meta"
2417 ) Sebagian besar papan ketik mempunyai tombol Alt, hanya beberapa papan
2418 ketik yang menggunakan tombol Meta.
2419 Jika anda memiliki keduanya, anda harus mencoba untuk memastikan tombol
2420 yang benar-benar aktif sebagai
2425 Tombol ini memiliki berbagai kegunaan selain berfungsi sebagai tombol
2430 Apabila anda menggunakan dengan kombinasi huruf dibawah menu, berarti and
2431 memilih menu tersebut.
2432 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2439 \begin_layout Standard
2440 Misalnya, urutan menekan tombol
2441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2447 \begin_inset space ~
2451 \begin_inset space ~
2457 \begin_inset space ~
2461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2464 akan membawa anda ke dialog
2465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2480 \begin_inset space ~
2486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2496 \begin_layout Standard
2501 memberikan daftar berbagai kombinasi perintah yang dinyatakan dengan tombol
2510 \begin_layout Standard
2511 Anda akan banyak menemukan berbagai gabungan tombol ketik serta pintasan
2512 yang digunakan di \SpecialChar LyX
2513 , karena setiap perintah gabungan akan menampilkan aksi
2514 yang anda lakukan serta pilihan gabungan tombol ketik lain yang bisa anda
2515 pilih di jendela status bawah.
2516 Notasi gabungan tombol ketik yang muncul akan mirip dengan yang digunakan
2517 di buku petunjuk, sehingga tidak membingungkan anda.
2518 Namun demikian untuk tombol Shift akan dinyatakan secara eksplisit, sehingga
2520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2535 diikuti dengan menulis huruf besar
2542 \begin_layout Standard
2543 Anda bisa melihat berbagai perintah gabungan melalui menu
2545 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
2550 Penyuntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
2552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2557 seperti dijelaskan di subbab
2558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2564 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2571 \begin_layout Chapter
2574 \begin_inset Index idx
2577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2587 \begin_layout Section
2589 \begin_inset Index idx
2592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2601 \begin_layout Subsection
2605 \begin_layout Standard
2606 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2607 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2608 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2609 numbering schemes, and so on.
2610 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2611 and format the title of your document differently.
2614 \begin_layout Standard
2619 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2620 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2621 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2622 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2623 picks one for you by default.
2624 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2627 \begin_layout Standard
2628 Read on for info about the document classes you can choose from \SpecialChar LyX
2630 to adjust their properties.
2633 \begin_layout Subsection
2635 \begin_inset Index idx
2638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2647 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2654 \begin_layout Standard
2655 You can select a class using the
2657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2658 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2662 \begin_inset Index idx
2665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2672 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2680 \begin_layout Standard
2681 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2686 \begin_layout Description
2687 Article for basic articles
2690 \begin_layout Description
2691 Report for basic reports
2694 \begin_layout Description
2695 Book for writing a book
2698 \begin_layout Description
2699 Letter for US-style letters
2702 \begin_layout Standard
2703 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2704 only uses if you have installed
2705 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2706 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2707 distributions will include
2709 Here are some of the classes.
2710 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2712 Special Document Classes
2721 \begin_layout Description
2722 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2725 \begin_layout Description
2726 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2730 \begin_layout Description
2731 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2735 \begin_layout Description
2736 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2737 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2738 There are three article layouts available.
2739 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2740 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2741 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2742 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2747 sequential numbering
2748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2751 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2752 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2753 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2754 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2757 \begin_layout Description
2758 Beamer Layout for presentations
2761 \begin_layout Description
2762 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2763 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2764 document class, but a new one which is distributed
2765 with \SpecialChar LyX
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2773 \begin_layout Description
2775 \begin_inset space ~
2778 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2781 \begin_layout Description
2782 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2785 \begin_layout Description
2786 Foils Used to make transparencies
2789 \begin_layout Description
2790 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2791 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2792 document class, but a new one which is distributed
2793 with \SpecialChar LyX
2797 \begin_layout Description
2798 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2799 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2802 \begin_layout Description
2803 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2806 \begin_layout Description
2807 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2810 \begin_layout Description
2811 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2812 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2813 (Is used by this document.)
2816 \begin_layout Description
2817 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2820 \begin_layout Description
2821 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2824 \begin_layout Description
2829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2836 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2837 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2839 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2843 \begin_layout Description
2844 Slides Used to make transparencies
2847 \begin_layout Description
2849 \begin_inset space ~
2852 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2853 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2856 \begin_layout Description
2857 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 We won't go into any detail about how to use these different document classes
2863 You can find all the details about the non-standard classes in Chapter
2869 Here, we will settle with a list of some of the common properties of all
2870 of the document classes.
2873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2877 \begin_layout Standard
2878 New users are sometimes puzzled by the fact that many of the document classes
2881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2882 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2904 Or they are surprised that, when they open e.
2905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2909 \begin_inset space ~
2916 template, they receive a warning saying that the document requires files
2917 that are not installed to produce output.
2918 So it seems that something is wrong.
2921 \begin_layout Standard
2922 But nothing is wrong.
2924 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2929 , are highly specialized.\SpecialChar LyX
2930 tries to support as many different types of documents
2931 as possible, and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
2932 with a growing number.
2933 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2934 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2935 by some document class.
2936 There are just too many of them.
2937 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2940 \begin_layout Standard
2941 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as `Unavailabl
2942 e', you need to install the appropriate package files.
2943 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2944 document class for a new file.
2946 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2951 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
2953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2960 manual for information on how to install them.
2961 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2967 \begin_layout Standard
2968 Although \SpecialChar LyX
2969 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
2970 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
2971 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
2972 class files to be used for dissertation
2973 s submitted to those universities.
2974 The \SpecialChar LyX
2975 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2977 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2980 \begin_inset space ~
2987 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2990 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2994 name "subsec:Modules"
2999 \begin_inset Index idx
3002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3011 \begin_layout Standard
3012 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3013 chosen document class.
3014 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3015 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3026 \begin_inset Index idx
3029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3036 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of the
3040 \begin_layout Standard
3041 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 packages that are not always installed by default.
3044 will warn you if you do not have the needed package.
3045 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3046 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3048 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3049 file without the missing package.
3050 If you want to be able to produce output, then you need to install the
3051 missing package and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3054 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3062 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3072 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3081 manual for more information on installing needed packages.
3084 \begin_layout Standard
3085 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3093 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3095 will advise you about these things.
3103 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3107 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3112 \begin_inset Index idx
3115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 Document ! Local Layout
3124 \begin_layout Standard
3125 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3126 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3127 : They are intended to be used in
3128 a variety of different documents, and if you often find yourself needing
3129 the same sort of thing in different documents, you should consider writing
3130 a module for this purpose.
3131 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, and you
3132 find yourself wanting a specific inset or character style, but only that
3134 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3136 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3154 manual for information on how to use it.
3157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3161 \begin_layout Standard
3162 Each class has a default set of options.
3163 Here's a quick table describing them:
3166 \begin_layout Standard
3167 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3175 \begin_inset Tabular
3176 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3177 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3181 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3182 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3636 \begin_layout Standard
3637 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3643 \begin_layout Standard
3644 You're probably also wondering what
3645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3649 \begin_inset space ~
3653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3657 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3658 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3663 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3668 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3678 headings, there are also
3686 headings, and so on.
3687 We'll describe these headings fully in section
3688 \begin_inset space ~
3692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3694 reference "subsec:Headings"
3701 \begin_layout Subsection
3703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3705 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3710 \begin_inset Index idx
3713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3722 \begin_inset Index idx
3725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3734 \begin_layout Standard
3735 The most important properties of documents classes are set in the menu
3737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3748 \begin_inset space ~
3753 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3755 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3756 doesn't support special options you want to
3757 use for your document.
3758 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3759 -class and its options, you have to read
3763 \begin_layout Standard
3770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3776 \begin_inset space ~
3781 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3782 You can choose between the following five options:
3785 \begin_layout Labeling
3786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3791 Use default page style of current class.
3794 \begin_layout Labeling
3795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3800 No page numbers or headings.
3803 \begin_layout Labeling
3804 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3812 \begin_layout Labeling
3813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3818 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3819 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3820 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3821 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3824 \begin_layout Labeling
3825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3830 This allows you to create fully customizable headers and footers if you
3831 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3837 \begin_inset Index idx
3840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 -packages ! fancyhdr
3848 How they are defined is explained in section
3849 \begin_inset space ~
3853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3855 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3862 \begin_layout Standard
3863 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3864 \begin_inset space ~
3868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3870 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3877 \begin_layout Subsection
3878 Paper Size and Orientation
3879 \begin_inset Index idx
3882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3883 Document ! Paper size
3889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3891 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3898 \begin_layout Standard
3899 You'll find the following options in the menu
3902 \begin_inset space ~
3909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3915 \begin_inset Index idx
3918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3927 \begin_layout Labeling
3928 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3932 \begin_inset space ~
3937 What size paper to print on.
3941 \begin_layout Itemize
3947 \begin_layout Itemize
3957 \begin_layout Itemize
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Labeling
3988 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3993 To choose whether to output as
4004 \begin_layout Labeling
4005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4009 \begin_inset space ~
4014 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4015 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4018 \begin_layout Subsection
4020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4022 name "subsec:Margins"
4027 \begin_inset Index idx
4030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4037 \begin_inset Index idx
4040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4049 \begin_layout Standard
4050 Paper margins are set in the menu
4052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings.
4070 Because KOMA-Script calculates then the printspace automatically by taking
4071 the paper format and the font size into account.
4074 \begin_layout Subsection
4078 \begin_layout Standard
4079 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4085 That includes the paragraph environments.
4086 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4087 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4088 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4090 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4099 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4101 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4102 will either need to create a new style yourself or else to convert these
4103 paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
4106 \begin_layout Section
4107 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4108 \begin_inset Index idx
4111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4112 Paragraph ! Indentation
4120 \begin_layout Subsection
4122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4124 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4131 \begin_layout Standard
4132 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4133 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4136 \begin_layout Standard
4137 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4138 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4139 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4140 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4144 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4150 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4151 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4152 language than English.
4154 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the used language.
4157 \begin_layout Standard
4158 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4159 and text — in fact, all of the spacings for just about everything are pre-coded
4160 into \SpecialChar LyX
4162 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4165 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4167 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4168 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4169 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4176 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4177 goes to produce a printable file.
4182 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4184 gives you the ability to globally change
4188 of these pre-coded spacings.
4189 We'll explain more later.
4192 \begin_layout Subsection
4193 Paragraph Separation
4194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4196 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4201 \begin_inset Index idx
4204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4205 Paragraph ! Separation
4213 \begin_layout Standard
4214 To separate paragraphs, select
4225 \begin_inset space ~
4232 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4236 \begin_inset Index idx
4239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4245 to indent paragraphs or add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4246 The size of the skips can be defined in the dialog, for the indentation
4247 you have to add this line to your document preamble:
4250 \begin_layout Standard
4260 \begin_layout Standard
4261 where length is a value in one of the units listed in Appendix
4262 \begin_inset space ~
4266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4268 reference "cap:Units"
4273 The default length is 30
4274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4280 \begin_layout Subsection
4284 \begin_layout Standard
4285 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4288 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4290 \begin_inset space ~
4295 dialog and toggle the
4298 \begin_inset space ~
4303 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4306 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4310 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4311 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4315 \begin_layout Standard
4316 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4317 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4320 \begin_layout Subsection
4322 \begin_inset Index idx
4325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4326 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4334 \begin_layout Standard
4337 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4341 \begin_inset Index idx
4344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4353 dialog you can set the line spacing in the submenu
4356 \begin_inset space ~
4365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4366 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4372 \begin_inset Index idx
4375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4377 -packages ! setspace
4382 installed to use this feature.
4390 \begin_layout Section
4391 Paragraph Environments
4392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4394 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4399 \begin_inset Index idx
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4403 Paragraph ! Environments
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4413 Paragraph environments|(
4421 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 \begin_layout Standard
4426 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4429 \begin_layout Standard
4448 \begin_inset Newline newline
4451 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4453 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4454 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4455 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4464 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4467 \begin_layout Standard
4468 A paragraph environment is simply a
4469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4476 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4477 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4478 scheme, labels, and so on.
4479 Additionally, you can
4480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4487 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4488 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4489 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4490 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hold-overs from the
4491 days of typewriters.
4492 There are several paragraph environments which are specific to a particular
4494 We'll only be covering the most common ones here.
4497 \begin_layout Standard
4498 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4499 \begin_inset Graphics
4500 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4506 at the left end of the toolbar.
4508 will change the environment of the
4512 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4513 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4514 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4527 create a new paragraph using the
4531 paragraph environment.
4533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4540 because if you are in one of these environments:
4543 \begin_layout Itemize
4549 \begin_layout Itemize
4555 \begin_layout Itemize
4561 \begin_layout Itemize
4567 \begin_layout Itemize
4573 \begin_layout Itemize
4579 \begin_layout Itemize
4585 \begin_layout Standard
4587 keeps the old paragraph environment when you hit
4591 , rather than resetting it to
4597 will still reset the nesting depth, however.
4598 Usually, starting a new paragraph resets both the paragraph environment
4599 and the nesting depth (for more on nesting see section
4600 \begin_inset space ~
4604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4606 reference "sec:Nesting"
4611 At the moment, all this is context-specific; you're better off expecting
4616 to reset the paragraph environment and depth.
4617 If you want a new paragraph to keep the current environment and depth,
4621 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
4627 \begin_layout Subsection
4631 \begin_layout Standard
4632 The default paragraph environment is
4637 It creates a plain paragraph.
4639 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4640 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4641 this manual) are in the
4648 \begin_layout Standard
4649 You can nest a paragraph using the
4653 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4661 \begin_layout Subsection
4663 \begin_inset Index idx
4666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4675 \begin_layout Standard
4676 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4677 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4686 for thanks or contact information.
4687 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4688 places all of this on a separate page
4689 along with today's date.
4690 For other types of documents, the title
4691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4698 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4702 \begin_layout Standard
4704 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4718 Here's how you use them:
4721 \begin_layout Itemize
4722 Put the title of your document in the
4729 \begin_layout Itemize
4730 Put the author name in the
4737 \begin_layout Itemize
4738 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4739 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4745 Note that using this environment is optional.
4746 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4747 will automatically insert today's date.
4748 If you don't want any date, add the line
4749 \begin_inset Newline newline
4759 \begin_inset Newline newline
4762 to the preamble of your document (menu
4764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4770 \begin_layout Standard
4771 You can use footnotes to insert
4772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4779 or contact information.
4782 \begin_layout Subsection
4784 \begin_inset Index idx
4787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4796 name "subsec:Headings"
4803 \begin_layout Standard
4804 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4806 takes care of the numbering for you.
4809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4811 \begin_inset Index idx
4814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4815 Section headings ! Numbered
4823 \begin_layout Standard
4824 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4828 \begin_layout Enumerate
4834 \begin_layout Enumerate
4840 \begin_layout Enumerate
4846 \begin_layout Enumerate
4852 \begin_layout Enumerate
4858 \begin_layout Enumerate
4864 \begin_layout Enumerate
4870 \begin_layout Standard
4872 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4873 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4874 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4877 \begin_layout Standard
4878 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4879 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4880 You group the book into chapters.
4882 does similar grouping:
4885 \begin_layout Itemize
4890 is divided in either
4901 \begin_layout Itemize
4913 \begin_layout Itemize
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
4949 \begin_layout Itemize
4961 \begin_layout Standard
4962 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4970 Not all document types use the
4974 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4979 is the top-level heading.
4987 \begin_layout Standard
4992 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
4993 labels it with its number,
4994 along with the number of the subsection, section, and, if applicable, chapter
4996 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5010 \begin_inset Index idx
5013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5014 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5022 \begin_layout Standard
5023 The unnumbered section headings have a
5024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5031 at the end of their name.
5032 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5033 the table of contents, see section
5034 \begin_inset space ~
5038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5048 Changing the Numbering
5049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5051 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5058 \begin_layout Standard
5059 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5060 in the Table of Contents.
5061 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5063 Certain classes start with
5077 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5087 This is something you can change.
5090 \begin_layout Standard
5093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5099 \begin_inset Index idx
5102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5113 \begin_inset space ~
5117 \begin_inset space ~
5122 you'll see two counters.
5127 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5128 numbers a section heading.
5129 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5134 Short Titles of Headings
5135 \begin_inset Index idx
5138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5139 Section headings ! Short titles
5145 \begin_inset Argument 1
5148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5157 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5166 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5167 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5168 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5171 \begin_layout Standard
5173 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5174 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5175 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5176 To specify a short title, use the menu
5178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5180 \begin_inset space ~
5186 This will insert a box labeled
5187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5202 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
5203 This also works for captions inside floats.
5206 \begin_layout Standard
5207 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5210 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The following information applies to all section headings:
5218 \begin_layout Itemize
5219 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5222 \begin_layout Itemize
5223 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5226 \begin_layout Itemize
5227 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5230 \begin_layout Itemize
5231 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5234 \begin_layout Subsection
5235 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5238 \begin_layout Standard
5240 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5254 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5255 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5256 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5257 the text they contain.
5258 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5266 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5269 \begin_layout Standard
5270 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5279 when you start a new paragraph.
5280 So, you can type in that poem and merrily hit
5284 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5285 Of course, that means that, once you're done typing in that poem, you have
5286 to change back to the
5290 environment yourself.
5293 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5310 \begin_inset Index idx
5313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5322 \begin_layout Standard
5323 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5324 time for the differences.
5333 are identical except for one difference:
5337 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5346 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5349 \begin_layout Standard
5350 Here's an example of the
5363 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5365 See – no indentation!
5369 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5370 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5371 the other paragraph.
5374 \begin_layout Standard
5375 Here's another example, this time in the
5382 \begin_layout Quotation
5388 If I keep writing, you'll see the indentation.
5389 If your country uses a writing style that shows off new paragraphs by indenting
5390 the first line, then
5394 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5398 you were quoting other text.
5401 \begin_layout Quotation
5402 Here's a new paragraph.
5403 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5404 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5407 \begin_layout Standard
5408 As the examples show,
5412 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5413 They should put quotes in the
5418 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5422 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5431 \begin_inset Index idx
5434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5443 \begin_inset Index idx
5446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5462 \begin_layout Standard
5467 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5473 \begin_inset Newline newline
5476 Which I did not rehearse!
5480 It could be much worse.
5481 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5483 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5484 indented a bit more than the first.
5485 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5491 \begin_inset Newline newline
5494 And make things look fine
5495 \begin_inset Newline newline
5501 arg "newline-insert newline"
5507 \begin_layout Standard
5512 does not indent both margins.
5513 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5514 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5521 arg "newline-insert newline"
5527 \begin_layout Subsection
5529 \begin_inset Index idx
5532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5548 \begin_layout Standard
5550 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5560 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5561 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5570 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5571 lets you provide your own label.
5572 We'll present the individual details of each type of list next after describing
5573 some general features of all four of them.
5576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5580 \begin_layout Standard
5581 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5583 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5584 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5593 reset the environment to
5597 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5598 The nesting depth is hereby kept.
5599 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5603 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5606 to break paragraphs.
5609 \begin_layout Standard
5610 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5611 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5612 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5614 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5615 you read all of section
5616 \begin_inset space ~
5620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5622 reference "sec:Nesting"
5630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5636 \begin_inset Index idx
5639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5656 The first type of list we'll describe in detail is the
5660 paragraph environment.
5661 It has the following properties:
5664 \begin_layout Itemize
5665 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5666 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5673 \begin_layout Itemize
5675 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5678 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5683 \begin_layout Itemize
5684 The items can have any length.
5686 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5687 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5694 \begin_layout Itemize
5699 environment inside another
5703 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5704 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5711 \begin_layout Itemize
5712 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5715 \begin_layout Itemize
5717 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5720 \begin_layout Itemize
5722 \begin_inset space ~
5726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5728 reference "sec:Nesting"
5732 for a full explanation of nesting.
5736 \begin_layout Standard
5737 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5746 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5751 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5754 \begin_layout Itemize
5755 The label for the first level
5759 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5760 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5767 \begin_layout Itemize
5768 The label for the second level is a dash.
5769 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5776 \begin_layout Itemize
5777 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5778 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5785 \begin_layout Itemize
5786 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5790 \begin_layout Itemize
5791 Back out to the third level.
5795 \begin_layout Itemize
5796 Back to the second level.
5800 \begin_layout Itemize
5801 Back to the outermost level.
5804 \begin_layout Standard
5805 These are the default labels for an
5810 You can customize these labels in the
5812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5815 dialog in the submenu
5822 \begin_inset Index idx
5825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5834 \begin_layout Standard
5835 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5836 We'll explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5838 \begin_inset space ~
5842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5844 reference "sec:Nesting"
5851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5857 \begin_inset Index idx
5860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5869 name "sec:Enumerate"
5876 \begin_layout Standard
5881 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5882 It has these properties:
5885 \begin_layout Enumerate
5886 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5887 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5894 \begin_layout Enumerate
5895 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5899 \begin_layout Enumerate
5901 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5904 \begin_layout Enumerate
5909 environment resets the counter to one.
5912 \begin_layout Enumerate
5922 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5929 \begin_layout Enumerate
5930 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5931 Items can have any length.
5934 \begin_layout Enumerate
5935 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5938 \begin_layout Enumerate
5939 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5942 \begin_layout Enumerate
5943 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5947 \begin_layout Standard
5956 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5958 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5959 labels the four different levels in an
5966 \begin_layout Enumerate
5967 The first level of an
5971 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5972 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5979 \begin_layout Enumerate
5980 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5981 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5988 \begin_layout Enumerate
5989 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5990 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5997 \begin_layout Enumerate
5998 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6001 \begin_layout Enumerate
6002 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6007 \begin_layout Enumerate
6008 Back to the third level
6012 \begin_layout Enumerate
6013 Back to the second level.
6017 \begin_layout Enumerate
6018 Back to the outermost level.
6021 \begin_layout Standard
6022 Once again, you can customize the type of numbering used in the
6027 It involves adding commands to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6033 As stated earlier, such customization only shows up in the printed version,
6034 not in \SpecialChar LyX
6038 \begin_layout Standard
6039 There is more to nesting
6043 environments than we've stated here.
6044 You should read section
6045 \begin_inset space ~
6049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6051 reference "sec:Nesting"
6055 to learn more about nesting.
6058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6064 \begin_inset Index idx
6067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6076 \begin_layout Standard
6077 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6081 list has no fixed label.
6082 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6091 of the first line as the label.
6095 \begin_layout Description
6096 Example: This is an example of the
6103 \begin_layout Standard
6105 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6109 \begin_layout Standard
6111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6118 it is meant that the first hit of the
6122 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6124 If you need to use more than one word in the label use a
6132 arg "space-insert protected"
6137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6138 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6140 \begin_inset space ~
6146 \begin_inset space ~
6150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6152 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6156 for more info.) Here is an example:
6159 \begin_layout Description
6161 \begin_inset space ~
6164 Example: This one shows how to use a
6167 \begin_inset space ~
6179 \begin_layout Description
6180 Usage: You should use the
6184 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6185 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6187 It's not a good idea to use a
6191 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6192 You're better off using
6204 paragraphs into them.
6207 \begin_layout Description
6208 Nesting: You can nest
6212 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6216 \begin_layout Standard
6217 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6218 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6219 them from the first line.
6222 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6223 The \SpecialChar LyX
6229 \begin_inset Index idx
6232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6233 Lists ! \SpecialChar LyX
6242 \begin_layout Standard
6247 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6248 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6252 \begin_layout Standard
6253 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6261 When you are using a KOMA-Script document class, like in this document,
6266 environment is named
6278 \begin_layout Standard
6287 environment has user-defined labels for each list item.
6288 There are the following properties of this list environment:
6291 \begin_layout Labeling
6292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6294 \begin_inset space ~
6297 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6306 of each line as the item label.
6311 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6312 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6313 blank as described above.
6316 \begin_layout Labeling
6317 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6318 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6319 uses different margins for the item label and the
6320 body of the item text.
6321 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6322 label width plus a little extra space.
6326 \begin_layout Labeling
6327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6329 \begin_inset space ~
6332 width \SpecialChar LyX
6333 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6334 If the label width is larger, the label
6335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6342 into the first line.
6343 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6344 margin of the rest of the item text.
6347 \begin_layout Labeling
6348 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6350 \begin_inset space ~
6353 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6358 environment have the same left margin.
6359 \begin_inset Newline newline
6362 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6365 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6367 \begin_inset space ~
6376 \begin_inset space ~
6381 determines the default label width.
6382 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6391 multiple times instead.
6392 The M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6402 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6405 \begin_inset space ~
6410 every time you alter a label in a
6415 \begin_inset Newline newline
6418 The predefined default width is the length of
6419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6428 \begin_inset Newline newline
6432 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6440 Setting the cursor into a list item to change only its label width will
6441 only change the width inside \SpecialChar LyX
6442 but not in the output.
6450 \begin_layout Standard
6455 environment the same way like the
6459 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6465 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6469 \begin_layout Standard
6474 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6476 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6478 \begin_inset space ~
6482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6484 reference "sec:Nesting"
6488 to learn about nesting.
6491 \begin_layout Standard
6492 There is yet another feature of the
6496 environment: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6497 left-justifies the item labels
6499 You can use additional
6503 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6504 justifies the item label.
6509 are documented in section
6510 \begin_inset space ~
6514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6516 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6521 Here are some examples:
6522 \begin_inset Newpage pagebreak
6528 \begin_layout Labeling
6529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6530 Left The default for
6537 \begin_layout Labeling
6538 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6539 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6546 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6549 \begin_layout Labeling
6550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6551 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6555 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6562 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6565 \begin_layout Subsection
6567 \begin_inset Index idx
6570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6579 \begin_layout Standard
6580 To use the features described in this section, you must load the module
6583 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6585 in the document settings.
6586 This loads the features of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6592 \begin_inset Index idx
6595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6597 -packages ! enumitem
6605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6606 Custom Enumerate Lists
6607 \begin_inset Index idx
6610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6611 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6619 \begin_layout Standard
6621 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6627 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6628 There you add the command
6631 \begin_layout Standard
6639 \begin_layout Standard
6651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6652 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6653 Code, look at section
6654 \begin_inset space ~
6658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6660 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6673 is hereby the counter of the enumeration in the first level.
6680 outputs the counter as small Roman numeral.
6681 For capital Roman numerals replace in the command above
6694 For Arabic numerals use
6702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6709 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6724 \begin_layout Standard
6726 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 You can only number 26
6735 \begin_inset space ~
6738 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6746 \begin_layout Standard
6747 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6748 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6751 \begin_layout Standard
6752 As example a list with custom numbering:
6755 \begin_layout Enumerate
6756 \begin_inset Argument 1
6759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6782 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6789 \begin_layout Enumerate
6790 \begin_inset Argument 1
6793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 \begin_layout Enumerate
6818 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6825 \begin_layout Enumerate
6826 \begin_inset Argument 1
6829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6850 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6857 \begin_layout Enumerate
6858 \begin_inset Argument 1
6861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6887 \begin_layout Standard
6888 For this list these commands were used:
6891 \begin_layout Standard
6902 \begin_inset Newline newline
6910 \begin_inset Newline newline
6918 \begin_inset Newline newline
6928 \begin_layout Standard
6935 makes the label emphasized and
6944 \begin_layout Standard
6945 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6953 When you changed the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6954 lists until you change the definition.
6962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6964 \begin_inset Index idx
6967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6970 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6978 \begin_layout Standard
6979 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6982 \begin_layout Enumerate
6983 \begin_inset Argument 1
6986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7005 \begin_inset Note Note
7008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7011 goes back to default numbering
7019 \begin_layout Enumerate
7023 \begin_layout Standard
7027 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7031 \begin_layout Standard
7032 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7037 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7038 to indicate that it is a resumed
7039 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7040 , but in the output.
7043 \begin_layout Standard
7044 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7052 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7061 \begin_layout Standard
7062 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number than the
7064 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7065 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7066 of a normal new enumeration.
7067 There insert the command
7070 \begin_layout Standard
7076 \begin_layout Standard
7081 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Enumerate
7093 \begin_layout Standard
7094 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7097 \begin_layout Enumerate
7098 \begin_inset Argument 1
7101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7117 This enumeration starts at 4
7120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7122 \begin_inset Index idx
7125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7134 \begin_layout Standard
7135 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7137 For example the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7140 \begin_layout Itemize
7144 \begin_layout Itemize
7145 with standard spacing
7148 \begin_layout Standard
7149 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7151 There add the command
7155 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7158 \begin_layout Itemize
7159 \begin_inset Argument 1
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7181 \begin_layout Itemize
7185 \begin_layout Itemize
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7197 \begin_inset Index idx
7200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7202 -packages ! enumitem
7208 For more info see its documentation,
7209 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7218 \begin_layout Standard
7219 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7221 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to the one of the
7222 paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7226 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7229 \begin_layout Enumerate
7230 \begin_inset Argument 1
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7241 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7254 \begin_layout Enumerate
7255 with negative indentation
7258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7259 Further Customization
7260 \begin_inset Index idx
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7273 You can also change the style of description lists.
7277 \begin_layout Standard
7283 \begin_layout Standard
7284 changes the description label font, the command
7287 \begin_layout Standard
7293 \begin_layout Standard
7294 sets the list style.
7297 \begin_layout Standard
7298 An example where the command
7301 \begin_layout Standard
7306 itshape, style=nextline
7309 \begin_layout Standard
7313 \begin_layout Description
7315 \begin_inset space ~
7319 \begin_inset Argument 1
7322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7328 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7330 itshape, style=nextline
7340 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7341 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7345 \begin_layout Description
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7350 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7351 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7352 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7356 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7362 \begin_inset Index idx
7365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7369 -packages ! enumitem
7375 For more info see its documentation,
7376 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7385 \begin_layout Subsection
7387 \begin_inset Index idx
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7407 \begin_inset space ~
7415 \begin_layout Standard
7416 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7417 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7425 \begin_inset space ~
7431 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7432 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7433 gags on the document.
7434 In contrast, you can use the
7441 \begin_inset space ~
7446 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7447 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7451 \begin_layout Standard
7452 Of course, you're not limited to using
7459 \begin_inset space ~
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7473 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7474 some European academic papers.
7477 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7481 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7488 \begin_layout Standard
7493 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7494 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7503 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7504 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7505 Here's an example of each:
7508 \begin_layout Right Address
7510 \begin_inset Newline newline
7514 \begin_inset Newline newline
7518 \begin_inset Newline newline
7521 When is it? What is today?
7524 \begin_layout Standard
7528 \begin_inset space ~
7534 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7536 the largest block of text on a single line.
7537 Here's an example of the
7544 \begin_layout Address
7546 \begin_inset Newline newline
7549 Where do I send this
7550 \begin_inset Newline newline
7553 Your post office and country
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7557 As you can see, both
7564 \begin_inset space ~
7569 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7574 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7575 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7581 This makes sense, since
7589 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7590 Thus, you have to use
7597 arg "newline-insert newline"
7603 \begin_inset space ~
7606 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
7608 \begin_inset space ~
7617 menu) to start a new line in an
7624 \begin_inset space ~
7632 \begin_layout Subsection
7636 \begin_layout Standard
7637 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7638 or list of references.
7640 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7643 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7647 \begin_inset Index idx
7650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7659 \begin_layout Standard
7664 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7665 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7666 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7667 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7671 in anything else or vice versa.
7677 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7678 The book document classes ignores the
7682 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7686 in a letter document class.
7689 \begin_layout Standard
7694 environment does several things for you.
7695 First, it puts the centered label
7696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7704 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7706 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7707 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7708 the subsequent text.
7709 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7711 The appearance in the output depends on the used article or report class.
7714 \begin_layout Standard
7715 Starting a new paragraph by hitting
7719 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7720 The new paragraph will still be in the
7725 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7726 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7729 \begin_layout Standard
7730 \begin_inset Float figure
7735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7737 \begin_inset Graphics
7738 filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf
7745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7746 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7751 name "cap:Paragraph-in-the"
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 We'd love to give you directly an example of the
7777 environment, but since this document is in the
7778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7785 class, we can't do this.
7786 We inserted it therefore as figure
7787 \begin_inset space ~
7791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7793 reference "cap:Paragraph-in-the"
7798 If you've never heard of an
7799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7806 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7815 \begin_inset Index idx
7818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7827 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7839 environment is used to list references.
7840 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7841 only use it at the end of the document.
7846 in anything else or vice versa won't work.
7849 \begin_layout Standard
7850 When you first open a
7854 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7855 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7871 depending on the document class.
7872 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7873 Each paragraph of the
7877 environment is a bibliography entry.
7882 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7883 Each new paragraph is still in the
7890 \begin_layout Standard
7891 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7892 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7894 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7896 handling, have a look at in section
7897 \begin_inset space ~
7901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7903 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7910 \begin_layout Subsection
7915 \begin_inset Index idx
7918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7919 Paragraph ! \SpecialChar LyX
7926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7928 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7935 \begin_layout Standard
7941 environment is another \SpecialChar LyX
7943 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7948 key as a fixed whitespace;
7952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7965 \begin_inset space ~
7970 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7975 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
7977 If you need to insert blank lines, you'll still need to use
7980 arg "newline-insert newline"
7997 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7998 So, when you finish using the
8003 environment, you'll need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8004 Also, you can nest the
8009 environment inside of others.
8012 \begin_layout Standard
8013 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8016 \begin_layout Itemize
8020 arg "newline-insert newline"
8023 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8028 \begin_inset space \space{}
8038 arg "newline-insert newline"
8044 \begin_layout Itemize
8048 arg "newline-insert newline"
8056 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8063 \begin_layout Itemize
8068 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
8075 \begin_layout Itemize
8079 arg "space-insert protected"
8086 \begin_layout Itemize
8087 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8088 You must put at least one
8092 in any line you want blank.
8093 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8097 \begin_layout Itemize
8098 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8102 since that will insert
8107 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8110 arg "self-insert \""
8116 \begin_layout Standard
8120 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8124 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8128 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8132 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8136 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8137 printf("Hello World!
8142 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8146 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8150 \begin_layout Standard
8151 This is just the standard
8152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8163 \begin_layout Standard
8169 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
8170 rc-files, and so on.
8171 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8172 as if you used a typewriter.
8173 \begin_inset Index idx
8176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8177 Paragraph environments|)
8182 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8185 Program Code Listings
8194 \begin_layout Section
8195 Nesting Environments
8196 \begin_inset Index idx
8199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8200 Nesting ! Environments
8206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8215 \begin_layout Subsection
8219 \begin_layout Standard
8221 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8223 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8225 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8227 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8239 \begin_layout Enumerate
8243 \begin_layout Enumerate
8245 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8252 \begin_layout Enumerate
8256 \begin_layout Enumerate
8261 \begin_layout Enumerate
8265 \begin_layout Standard
8266 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8267 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8270 \begin_inset space ~
8274 \begin_inset space ~
8282 \begin_inset space ~
8286 \begin_inset space ~
8295 menu to change the nesting depth of the current paragraph (the status bar
8296 will tell you how far you are nested).
8297 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8300 arg "depth-increment"
8306 arg "depth-decrement"
8309 or the convenient key bindings
8320 arg "depth-increment"
8326 arg "depth-decrement"
8329 to change the nesting level.
8330 The change will work on the current selection if you have made one (allowing
8331 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8335 \begin_layout Standard
8336 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8337 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8338 If it's invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8339 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8340 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8343 \begin_layout Standard
8344 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8346 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8348 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8351 \begin_layout Subsection
8352 What You Can and Can't Nest
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8357 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8360 \begin_layout Standard
8361 The question if nesting a paragraph environment is possible, is a bit more
8362 complicated than a simple yes or no.
8363 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8366 \begin_layout Itemize
8367 Completely unnestable
8370 \begin_layout Itemize
8371 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8375 \begin_layout Itemize
8376 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8380 \begin_layout Standard
8381 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8382 environments have them:
8385 \begin_layout Description
8386 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8387 Can't nest into them.
8388 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8395 \begin_layout Itemize
8401 \begin_layout Itemize
8407 \begin_layout Itemize
8413 \begin_layout Itemize
8419 \begin_layout Itemize
8426 \begin_layout Description
8428 \begin_inset space ~
8431 Nestable You can nest them.
8432 You can nest other things into them.
8433 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8440 \begin_layout Itemize
8446 \begin_layout Itemize
8452 \begin_layout Itemize
8458 \begin_layout Itemize
8464 \begin_layout Itemize
8470 \begin_layout Itemize
8476 \begin_layout Itemize
8482 \begin_layout Itemize
8490 \begin_layout Description
8491 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8492 You can't nest anything into them.
8493 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8500 \begin_layout Itemize
8506 \begin_layout Itemize
8512 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 \begin_layout Itemize
8524 \begin_layout Itemize
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8566 \begin_layout Itemize
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_inset space ~
8588 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Standard
8596 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8604 Although it is possible to nest numbered section headings like
8613 \begin_inset space ~
8617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8621 \begin_inset space \space{}
8624 lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create
8625 well structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested
8626 section headings violate this.
8634 \begin_layout Subsection
8635 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8636 \begin_inset Index idx
8639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8640 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8648 \begin_layout Standard
8649 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8650 affected by nesting anyhow.
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8658 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Standard
8668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8676 Figures and tables in
8680 are not affected by this.
8685 Have a look at section
8686 \begin_inset space ~
8690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8692 reference "sec:Floats"
8696 for more information about
8703 \begin_layout Standard
8705 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8706 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8710 \begin_layout Standard
8711 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8719 of its own, it behaves just like a
8720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8727 paragraph environment.
8728 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8733 Here's an example with a table:
8736 \begin_layout Enumerate
8738 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8745 \begin_layout Enumerate
8746 This is (a) and it's nested.
8747 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8754 \begin_layout Standard
8755 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8761 \begin_layout Standard
8763 \begin_inset Tabular
8764 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8765 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8766 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8767 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8851 \begin_layout Standard
8852 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8859 \begin_layout Enumerate
8861 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8865 \begin_layout Enumerate
8869 \begin_layout Standard
8870 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8873 \begin_layout Enumerate
8875 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8882 \begin_layout Enumerate
8883 This is (a) and it's nested.
8887 \begin_layout Standard
8888 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8894 \begin_layout Standard
8896 \begin_inset Tabular
8897 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8898 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8899 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8900 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8984 \begin_layout Standard
8985 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8991 \begin_layout Enumerate
8998 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9001 \begin_layout Enumerate
9005 \begin_layout Standard
9006 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9010 \begin_layout Standard
9011 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9014 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9017 \begin_layout Enumerate
9019 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9027 This is (a) and it's nested.
9030 \begin_layout Standard
9031 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9037 \begin_layout Standard
9039 \begin_inset Tabular
9040 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9041 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9043 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9127 \begin_layout Standard
9128 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9134 \begin_layout Enumerate
9136 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9144 \begin_layout Enumerate
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9149 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9155 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9156 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9160 \begin_layout Subsection
9161 Usage and General Features
9164 \begin_layout Standard
9165 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9166 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9175 is the innermost possible depth.
9176 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9179 \begin_layout Enumerate
9180 level #1 – outermost
9181 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9188 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9197 \begin_layout Enumerate
9199 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9206 \begin_layout Enumerate
9208 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9215 \begin_layout Itemize
9217 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9224 \begin_layout Itemize
9233 \begin_layout Standard
9234 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9235 both of them in the example.
9236 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9246 For example, if we tried to nest another
9251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9258 , we would get errors.
9261 \begin_layout Subsection
9263 \begin_inset Index idx
9266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9275 \begin_layout Standard
9276 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9277 We have several examples of nested environments.
9278 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9283 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9286 \begin_layout Labeling
9287 \labelwidthstring MMM
9288 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9294 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9301 \begin_layout Labeling
9302 \labelwidthstring MMM
9303 #2-a This is level #2.
9304 We created it by using
9307 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9313 arg "depth-increment"
9317 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9324 \begin_layout Labeling
9325 \labelwidthstring MMM
9326 #3-a This is level #3.
9327 This time, we just hit
9334 arg "depth-increment"
9338 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9342 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9348 arg "depth-increment"
9352 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9359 \begin_layout Standard
9364 environment, nested inside of
9365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9373 So, it's at level #4.
9374 We did this by hitting
9377 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9383 arg "depth-increment"
9386 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9391 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9407 \begin_layout Standard
9412 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9415 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9421 \begin_layout Labeling
9422 \labelwidthstring MMM
9423 #4-a This is level #4.
9427 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9430 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9435 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9439 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9444 keep nesting things inside
9445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9453 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9460 \begin_layout Labeling
9461 \labelwidthstring MMM
9462 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9464 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9471 \begin_layout Labeling
9472 \labelwidthstring MMM
9473 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9474 and this is level #6.
9475 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9479 \begin_layout Labeling
9480 \labelwidthstring MMM
9481 #5-b Back to level #5.
9485 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9491 arg "depth-decrement"
9498 \begin_layout Labeling
9499 \labelwidthstring MMM
9503 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9509 arg "depth-decrement"
9512 , we're back at level #4.
9516 \begin_layout Labeling
9517 \labelwidthstring MMM
9518 #3-b Back to level #3.
9519 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9523 \begin_layout Labeling
9524 \labelwidthstring MMM
9525 #2-b Back to level #2.
9530 \begin_layout Labeling
9531 \labelwidthstring MMM
9532 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9533 After this sentence, we'll hit
9537 and change the paragraph environment back to
9544 \begin_layout Standard
9545 We could have also used the
9561 environment in place of the
9566 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9569 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9570 Example 2: Inheritance
9573 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9574 This is the \SpecialChar LyX
9575 -Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9578 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9587 arg "depth-increment"
9590 , after which, we'll change to the
9595 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9602 \begin_layout Enumerate
9607 environment, at level #2.
9610 \begin_layout Enumerate
9611 Notice how the nested
9615 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9620 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9624 \begin_layout Standard
9625 We ended this example by hitting
9630 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9634 and reset the nesting depth by using
9637 arg "depth-decrement"
9643 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9644 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9653 \begin_inset Argument 1
9656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9657 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9665 \begin_layout Enumerate
9666 This is level #1, in an
9670 paragraph environment.
9671 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9672 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9679 \begin_layout Enumerate
9684 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9690 arg "depth-increment"
9694 Now, what happens if we nest an
9698 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9699 label be? An asterisk?
9700 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9707 \begin_layout Itemize
9717 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9718 So, its label is a bullet.
9719 (We got here by using
9722 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9728 arg "depth-increment"
9731 , then changing the environment to
9736 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9743 \begin_layout Itemize
9744 Here's level #4, produced using
9747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9753 arg "depth-increment"
9757 We'll do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9759 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9766 \begin_layout Enumerate
9769 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9774 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9778 , because we are in the
9787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9806 \begin_layout Enumerate
9811 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9812 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9816 \begin_layout Enumerate
9817 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9820 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9823 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9826 \begin_layout Enumerate
9830 arg "depth-decrement"
9833 to decrease the depth after the next
9836 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9843 \begin_layout Enumerate
9845 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9850 \begin_layout Enumerate
9852 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9853 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9857 \begin_layout Enumerate
9858 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9867 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9872 reset the counter for the label.
9876 \begin_layout Enumerate
9880 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9886 arg "depth-decrement"
9889 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9890 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9891 into the twofold-nested
9899 \begin_layout Enumerate
9900 The same thing happens if we do another
9903 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9909 arg "depth-decrement"
9912 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9915 \begin_layout Standard
9916 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9921 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9936 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9943 The same rule applies for the
9947 environment, as well.
9950 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9951 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9954 \begin_layout Enumerate
9955 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9956 We won't nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into the
9957 same detail with how we did it.
9963 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9970 \begin_layout Standard
9978 arg "depth-increment"
9985 : level #2) We'll stick an encapsulated description of how we created the
9986 example in parentheses someplace.
9987 For example, the two keybindings are how we changed the depth.
9988 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9989 Either before or after this, we'll put in the level.
9993 \begin_layout Enumerate
9998 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9999 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10006 \begin_layout Verse
10007 Now we'll add verse.
10008 \begin_inset Newline newline
10011 It will get much worse.
10012 \begin_inset Newline newline
10022 arg "depth-increment"
10032 \begin_layout Verse
10033 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10034 \begin_inset Newline newline
10037 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10038 \begin_inset Newline newline
10044 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10052 \begin_layout Verse
10053 Here comes a table:
10054 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10061 \begin_layout Standard
10062 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10068 \begin_layout Standard
10070 \begin_inset Tabular
10071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10072 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10159 \begin_layout Verse
10163 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10173 arg "depth-increment"
10179 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10189 arg "depth-decrement"
10196 \begin_layout Enumerate
10201 : level #1) This is another item.
10202 Note that selecting a
10206 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10207 3 times to put the table inside the
10215 \begin_layout Quotation
10216 We're now ending the
10220 list and changing to
10225 We're still at level #1.
10226 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10227 The next set of paragraphs is a
10228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10235 We'll nest both the
10242 \begin_inset space ~
10247 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10251 for the letter body.
10255 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10258 to preserve the depth.
10259 Remember that you need to use
10262 arg "newline-insert newline"
10265 to create multiple lines inside the
10272 \begin_inset space ~
10279 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10286 \begin_layout Right Address
10288 \begin_inset Newline newline
10291 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10292 \begin_inset Newline newline
10298 \begin_layout Address
10300 \begin_inset space ~
10306 \begin_layout Quotation
10307 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10311 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10312 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10313 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10314 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10315 as soon as possible.
10316 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10319 \begin_layout Quotation
10320 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10321 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10322 with your order, along with payment.
10325 \begin_layout Quotation
10326 We thank you again for your patience.
10329 \begin_layout Address
10331 \begin_inset Newline newline
10338 \begin_layout Quotation
10339 That ends that example!
10342 \begin_layout Standard
10343 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10344 gives you a lot of power with just
10346 We could have easily nested an
10367 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10370 \begin_layout Section
10371 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10372 \begin_inset Index idx
10375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10384 \begin_layout Standard
10385 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10386 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10388 more spaces: Spaces of different width and spaces which can or cannot be
10389 broken at the end of a line.
10390 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10394 \begin_layout Subsection
10396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10398 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10403 \begin_inset Index idx
10406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10415 \begin_layout Standard
10416 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10417 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10418 ) not to break the line at
10420 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky linebreaks, like in:
10423 \begin_layout Quote
10424 Further documentation is given in section
10425 \begin_inset Newline newline
10429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10431 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10439 \begin_layout Standard
10440 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10455 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10464 A protected space is set with
10466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10467 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10471 \begin_inset space ~
10481 arg "space-insert protected"
10487 \begin_layout Subsection
10489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10491 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10496 \begin_inset Index idx
10499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10500 Spacing ! Horizontal
10508 \begin_layout Standard
10509 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10512 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10516 The length units are listed in Appendix
10517 \begin_inset space ~
10521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10523 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
10530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10534 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10539 \begin_inset Index idx
10542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10543 Spaces ! Inter-word
10551 \begin_layout Standard
10553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10557 \begin_inset space \space{}
10560 English) have the typographical convention to add extra space after an end-of-se
10561 ntence punctuation mark, and \SpecialChar LyX
10562 honors those conventions (see section
10563 \begin_inset space ~
10567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10569 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10574 Sometimes, you want a normal space nevertheless.
10575 In this case, insert an inter-word space (shortcut
10578 arg "space-insert normal"
10584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10588 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10593 \begin_inset Index idx
10596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10605 \begin_layout Standard
10607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10614 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10623 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10624 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance
10625 inside abbreviations:
10628 \begin_layout Quote
10630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10634 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 or between values and units.
10639 Compare for example this:
10640 \begin_inset Newline newline
10644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10648 \begin_inset Newline newline
10651 10 kg (normal space
10654 \begin_layout Standard
10655 You can insert thin spaces also with the menu
10657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10658 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10660 \begin_inset space ~
10668 arg "space-insert thin"
10674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10678 name "subsec:More-Spaces"
10685 \begin_layout Standard
10686 You can furthermore insert the following space types:
10689 \begin_layout Description
10691 \begin_inset space ~
10695 \begin_inset space ~
10698 space A line with a
10699 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10703 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10707 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10710 Negative thin space between the arrows.
10713 \begin_layout Description
10715 \begin_inset space ~
10719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10723 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10727 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10731 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10738 em) space between the arrows.
10741 \begin_layout Description
10743 \begin_inset space ~
10747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10751 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10755 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10759 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10763 \begin_inset space ~
10767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10770 em) space between the arrows.
10773 \begin_layout Description
10775 \begin_inset space ~
10779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10783 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10787 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10791 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10795 \begin_inset space ~
10799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10802 em) space between the arrows.
10805 \begin_layout Description
10807 \begin_inset space ~
10811 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10815 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10820 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10827 cm space between the arrows.
10830 \begin_layout Standard
10832 \begin_inset space ~
10836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10838 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10842 lists the different space sizes.
10845 \begin_layout Standard
10846 \begin_inset Float table
10851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10853 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10858 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10862 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10872 \begin_inset Tabular
10873 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10874 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10875 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10876 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11093 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11099 \begin_inset Index idx
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11111 \begin_layout Standard
11112 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11113 feature for adding extra space
11114 in a uniform fashion.
11115 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11116 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11117 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11118 equally between themselves.
11122 \begin_layout Standard
11123 Here a few examples what you can do with them:
11126 \begin_layout Quote
11128 This is on the left side
11129 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11132 This is on the right
11135 \begin_layout Quote
11138 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11142 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11148 \begin_layout Quote
11151 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11155 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11159 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11165 \begin_layout Standard
11166 That was an example in the
11172 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11176 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11180 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11183 is one in a standard paragraph.
11184 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11188 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11191 \begin_layout Standard
11192 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11195 \begin_inset space ~
11200 in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11203 \begin_layout Standard
11205 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11209 \begin_inset space ~
11215 \begin_layout Standard
11217 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11221 \begin_inset space ~
11227 \begin_layout Standard
11229 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11233 \begin_inset space ~
11239 \begin_layout Standard
11241 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11245 \begin_inset space ~
11251 \begin_layout Standard
11253 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11257 \begin_inset space ~
11263 \begin_layout Standard
11265 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11269 \begin_inset space ~
11275 \begin_layout Standard
11276 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11284 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11288 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11290 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11291 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11295 option in the space dialog.
11303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11307 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11312 \begin_inset Index idx
11315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11324 \begin_layout Standard
11325 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11331 \begin_inset space \space{}
11334 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11337 \begin_layout Standard
11338 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11341 What is correct English?:
11342 \begin_inset Newline newline
11346 \begin_inset Newline newline
11350 \begin_inset space ~
11353 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11354 \begin_inset Newline newline
11358 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11369 \begin_inset Newline newline
11373 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11384 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11390 \begin_layout Standard
11391 So that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11396 \begin_inset space ~
11400 \begin_inset space ~
11404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11408 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11410 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11411 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11415 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11421 \begin_inset space ~
11425 \begin_inset space ~
11429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11432 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11441 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11442 That is why it is named
11443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11451 The normal phantom ouputs the width and heigth of the content as space,
11452 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11456 \begin_layout Subsection
11458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11460 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11465 \begin_inset Index idx
11468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11477 \begin_layout Standard
11478 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11480 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11481 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11483 \begin_inset space ~
11489 There you find the following sizes:
11492 \begin_layout Standard
11505 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11506 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11511 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11513 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11517 \begin_inset Index idx
11520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11521 Document ! Settings
11526 for the paragraph separation.
11527 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11538 \begin_layout Standard
11544 \begin_inset Index idx
11547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11553 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11554 An example: You have only two short paragraphs on one page with a vfill
11556 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11557 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11566 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11575 s are described in section
11576 \begin_inset space ~
11580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11582 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11591 If there are several
11595 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11596 You can therefore use
11600 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11603 \begin_layout Standard
11608 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11609 \begin_inset space ~
11613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11615 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
11622 \begin_layout Standard
11623 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11633 When the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11634 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11646 \begin_layout Subsection
11647 Paragraph Alignment
11650 \begin_layout Standard
11651 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11653 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11657 There are five possibilities:
11660 \begin_layout Itemize
11668 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11674 \begin_layout Itemize
11682 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11688 \begin_layout Itemize
11696 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11702 \begin_layout Itemize
11710 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11716 \begin_layout Itemize
11724 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11730 \begin_layout Standard
11731 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11732 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11733 the left and right margins.
11734 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11735 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11741 \begin_layout Standard
11743 This paragraph is right aligned,
11746 \begin_layout Standard
11748 this one is centered,
11751 \begin_layout Standard
11753 this one is left aligned.
11756 \begin_layout Subsection
11758 \begin_inset Index idx
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11762 Page breaks ! Forced
11768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11770 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11777 \begin_layout Standard
11778 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11779 does the pagebreaks in your document, you can
11780 force a page break where you want one.
11781 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11782 is good at page breaking.
11783 Only if you use a lot of
11787 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11788 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11791 \begin_layout Standard
11792 We recommend not to use forced pagebreaks until the text is finished and
11793 until you have checked in the preview to see if you
11797 have to change the page breaking.
11800 \begin_layout Standard
11801 There are two types of pagebreaks: One that ends the page without any special
11803 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11805 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11806 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11808 \begin_inset space ~
11814 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11817 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11819 \begin_inset space ~
11824 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11826 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11827 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11830 \begin_layout Standard
11831 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11832 at the top of a page.
11833 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11835 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11836 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11837 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11841 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11845 to learn more about
11852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11856 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11861 \begin_inset Index idx
11864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11865 Page breaks ! Clear
11873 \begin_layout Standard
11874 Rather than forced pagebreaks where the content behind the break is placed
11875 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11876 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11877 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed behind
11878 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11881 \begin_layout Standard
11882 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11884 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11885 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11887 \begin_inset space ~
11893 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11895 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11896 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11898 \begin_inset space ~
11902 \begin_inset space ~
11907 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11908 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11911 \begin_layout Subsection
11913 \begin_inset Index idx
11916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11925 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11932 \begin_layout Standard
11933 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: One that simply
11935 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11938 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11940 \begin_inset space ~
11944 \begin_inset space ~
11952 arg "newline-insert newline"
11956 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11959 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11961 \begin_inset space ~
11965 \begin_inset space ~
11970 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11972 This is necessary to avoid
11973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11980 in justified paragraphs due to whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11983 \begin_layout Standard
11984 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
11985 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
11987 very good at line breaking.
11988 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to actively
11989 set a line break, e.
11990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11994 \begin_inset space \space{}
11997 in a poem or for an address (see sections
11998 \begin_inset space ~
12002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12004 reference "sec:Quote"
12009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12011 reference "sec:Verse"
12016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12018 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12025 \begin_layout Subsection
12027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12029 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12034 \begin_inset Index idx
12037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12048 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12063 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12065 \begin_inset space ~
12070 you can insert horizontal lines.
12071 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12072 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12073 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12076 \begin_layout Standard
12078 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12089 \begin_layout Standard
12093 \begin_layout Section
12094 Characters and Symbols
12097 \begin_layout Standard
12098 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12099 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter e.
12100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12104 \begin_inset space \space{}
12107 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12115 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12119 for information on how this is done.
12122 \begin_layout Standard
12123 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12128 dialog via the menu
12130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12131 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12137 \begin_layout Standard
12138 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12146 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12147 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12149 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12157 \begin_layout Section
12158 Fonts and Text Styles
12159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12161 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12168 \begin_layout Subsection
12170 \begin_inset Index idx
12173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12182 \begin_layout Standard
12183 There are two types of fonts:
12186 \begin_layout Description
12188 \begin_inset space ~
12192 \begin_inset Index idx
12195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12201 are fonts, built from outlines of the single glyphs (i.
12202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12206 characters) in the font.
12207 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12208 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12209 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12210 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12211 This means that outline fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12212 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12213 to provide a good image, it might be hard to provide a good rendering.
12214 \begin_inset Newline newline
12217 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12218 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12219 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12220 sizes than at small ones.
12221 \begin_inset Newline newline
12235 \begin_inset space ~
12243 \begin_layout Description
12245 \begin_inset space ~
12249 \begin_inset Index idx
12252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12258 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start, so they
12259 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12260 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12261 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12262 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in a
12263 picture manipulation program.
12264 In order to relieve this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12265 several fixed sizes typically from around 8 pixels high up to 34 pixels
12266 or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12267 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12268 to display each glyph, so bitmap fonts are thus faster displayed than scalable
12270 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12271 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12272 \begin_inset Newline newline
12275 Bitmap fonts are named
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12283 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12286 \begin_layout Standard
12287 The result of all this, is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they
12288 are designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12289 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12290 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12291 use scalable fonts.
12294 \begin_layout Standard
12295 To test which fonts are used in a PDF-document, you can have a look into
12296 its document properties.
12299 \begin_layout Standard
12300 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12301 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12302 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12303 font to emphasize text, you use an
12304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12312 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12314 In \SpecialChar LyX
12315 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12319 \begin_layout Subsection
12322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12324 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12331 \begin_layout Standard
12332 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12333 uses its own fonts.
12334 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12335 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12338 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12339 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12340 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12341 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited, compared
12342 to usual word processors.
12343 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12344 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12345 files are very portable across
12346 different machines.
12347 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12348 was increased a lot
12349 meanwhile so that you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
12350 In \SpecialChar LyX
12351 , only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12353 \begin_inset space ~
12357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12359 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12364 However, all others are available if you enter the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
12366 the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12371 Furthermore, recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12372 engines that are also
12373 able to directly access fonts that are installed for your operating system
12374 (OS), namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12375 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12377 Both engines are now supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12379 By using them, you can use theoretically any OpenType or TrueType font
12380 that is installed on your system.
12381 The next section describes how to use these OS fonts.
12384 \begin_layout Standard
12385 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12393 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12394 es; so you might have to experiment.
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12403 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12412 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12413 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12414 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12415 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12424 \begin_layout Subsection
12425 Document Font and Font size
12426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12428 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12433 \begin_inset Index idx
12436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12443 \begin_inset Index idx
12446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12456 You can set the document fonts in the
12458 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12462 \begin_inset Index idx
12465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12466 Document ! Settings
12472 There you can specify which font should be used for the three different
12473 font shapes roman (serif),
12476 \begin_inset space ~
12488 \begin_layout Standard
12489 The possible options for the font include
12493 and a list of fonts available on your system.
12498 uses the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12506 \begin_inset space ~
12512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12525 European Computer Modern
12528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12538 \begin_layout Standard
12547 are bitmap fonts, they often looks pixelated in PDF output, especially
12548 when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12556 \begin_inset space ~
12561 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12567 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12568 There are three ways to use one:
12571 \begin_layout Itemize
12575 \begin_inset space ~
12580 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12593 \begin_inset space ~
12598 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12599 community in order to replace
12603 as the default font.
12604 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12605 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12608 \begin_inset space ~
12621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12622 One difference is improved kerning.
12630 \begin_layout Itemize
12634 \begin_inset space ~
12638 \begin_inset space ~
12643 fonts in (the rare) case that
12646 \begin_inset space ~
12651 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12666 Virtual means that it
12667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12678 -glyphs from other fonts.
12679 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12701 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12707 \begin_inset Index idx
12710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12714 -packages ! aeguill
12719 with the document preamble line
12720 \begin_inset Newline newline
12727 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12728 \begin_inset Newline newline
12733 will fix the guillemet problem.
12738 and that accented characters are not
12742 glyph, but build of
12746 characters, the accent and the letter.
12747 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12753 If you search for example for the French word
12754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12761 in a PDF, you won't get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches for
12763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12770 and not for the glyph
12771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12775 \begin_inset space ~
12779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12785 \begin_layout Itemize
12786 If you do not like the look of
12794 , you can of course select one of the other provided vector fonts, e.
12795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12805 \begin_inset space ~
12817 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12818 \begin_inset space ~
12821 serif and typewriter fonts
12825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12826 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12842 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12847 \begin_inset space \space{}
12855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12859 \begin_inset space \space{}
12865 \begin_inset space ~
12873 \begin_inset space ~
12883 , but you can also select your own.
12884 \begin_inset Newline newline
12887 The differences between roman,
12890 \begin_inset space ~
12899 fonts are explained in section
12900 \begin_inset space ~
12904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12906 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12911 \begin_inset Newline newline
12917 \begin_inset space ~
12922 was originally designed for newspapers.
12923 That means its glyphs are smaller than the ones from other fonts to fit
12924 into the small newspaper columns.
12928 \begin_inset space ~
12933 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12936 \begin_layout Standard
12937 For the font size there are four possible values:
12954 depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12955 -system, normally it is equal to the font size 10.
12958 \begin_layout Standard
12959 The font sizes are the
12964 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
12965 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
12966 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12967 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12970 \begin_inset space ~
12976 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12977 \begin_inset space ~
12981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12983 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12990 \begin_layout Standard
12995 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12996 a font to display the script characters.
13000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13001 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13007 So this has no effect for the document language
13023 \begin_layout Standard
13024 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13028 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13036 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13041 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13042 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13044 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13046 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13049 dialog, see section
13050 \begin_inset space ~
13054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13056 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13068 \begin_layout Subsection
13069 Using Different Character Styles
13070 \begin_inset Index idx
13073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13080 \begin_inset Index idx
13083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13092 \begin_layout Standard
13093 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13094 automatically changes the character style for certain
13095 paragraph environments.
13097 supports two character styles,
13106 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
13110 \begin_layout Standard
13115 style, do one of the following:
13118 \begin_layout Itemize
13119 click on the toolbar button
13128 \begin_layout Itemize
13129 use the key binding
13138 \begin_layout Standard
13139 These commands are all toggles.
13144 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13147 \begin_layout Standard
13148 One typically uses the
13152 style for proper names.
13154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13161 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13169 \begin_layout Standard
13170 A more widely used character style is the
13175 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13182 \begin_layout Itemize
13183 clicking on the toolbar button
13192 \begin_layout Itemize
13193 using the keybindings
13202 \begin_layout Standard
13207 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13209 use a different font.
13212 \begin_layout Standard
13213 We've been using the
13217 style all over the place in this document.
13218 Here's one more example:
13221 \begin_layout Quotation
13224 Don't overuse character styles!
13227 \begin_layout Standard
13228 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13229 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13230 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13231 the common tendency to overuse character style.
13235 \begin_layout Standard
13236 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13246 \begin_inset space ~
13254 \begin_layout Subsection
13255 Fine-Tuning with the Text Style dialog
13256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13258 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13263 \begin_inset Index idx
13266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13275 \begin_layout Standard
13276 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning, so
13278 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13279 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13280 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13281 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13282 from ordinary dialog.
13285 \begin_layout Standard
13286 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13287 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13288 \begin_inset Newline newline
13291 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not well readable and
13292 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13295 \begin_layout Standard
13296 To use custom character styles, open the
13298 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13305 dialog or press the toolbar button
13308 arg "dialog-show character"
13312 There are several boxes on this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13313 font property which you can choose.
13314 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13322 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13327 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13328 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13329 environments in a snap.
13332 \begin_layout Standard
13333 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13336 \begin_inset space ~
13348 \begin_layout Labeling
13349 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13363 The possible options are:
13364 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
13371 \begin_layout Labeling
13372 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13377 This is the Roman font family.
13378 Normally a serif font.
13379 It's also the default family.
13389 \begin_layout Labeling
13390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13401 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13413 \begin_layout Labeling
13414 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13421 This is the Typewriter font family.
13427 arg "font-typewriter"
13436 \begin_layout Labeling
13437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13442 This corresponds to the print weight.
13444 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
13451 \begin_layout Labeling
13452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13457 This is the Medium font series.
13458 It's also the default series.
13461 \begin_layout Labeling
13462 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13469 This is the Bold font series.
13482 \begin_layout Labeling
13483 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13488 As the name implies.
13490 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
13497 \begin_layout Labeling
13498 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13503 This is the Upright font shape.
13504 It's also the default shape.
13507 \begin_layout Labeling
13508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13522 s the Italic font shape
13528 \begin_layout Labeling
13529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13536 This is the Slanted font shape
13538 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13539 , this is different from italic).
13542 \begin_layout Labeling
13543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13547 \begin_inset space ~
13554 This is the Small caps font shape
13561 \begin_layout Labeling
13562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13567 Alters the size of the font.
13568 You'll find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportio
13569 nal to the document font size.
13570 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
13571 the details, but a general description of what
13574 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
13581 \begin_layout Labeling
13582 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13603 arg "font-size tiny"
13609 \begin_layout Labeling
13610 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13631 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13637 \begin_layout Labeling
13638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13659 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13665 \begin_layout Labeling
13666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13687 arg "font-size small"
13693 \begin_layout Labeling
13694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13708 It's also the default size.
13712 arg "font-size normal"
13718 \begin_layout Labeling
13719 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13740 arg "font-size large"
13746 \begin_layout Labeling
13747 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13768 arg "font-size larger"
13774 \begin_layout Labeling
13775 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13796 arg "font-size largest"
13802 \begin_layout Labeling
13803 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13824 arg "font-size huge"
13830 \begin_layout Labeling
13831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13852 arg "font-size giant"
13859 \begin_layout Standard
13864 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13865 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13867 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13868 — use that instead.
13869 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13872 \begin_layout Labeling
13873 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13878 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13880 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
13887 \begin_layout Labeling
13888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13895 This is text with emphasize on
13898 This might seem like the same as
13902 , but it is actually a bit different.
13908 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13910 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13913 \begin_layout Labeling
13914 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13921 This is text with Underbar on.
13927 arg "font-underline"
13933 \begin_inset Newline newline
13938 Avoid using underbar if you can! It's a hangover from the typewriter days,
13939 when you couldn't change fonts.
13940 We no longer need to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13941 It is only included in \SpecialChar LyX
13942 because some people
13946 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13949 \begin_layout Labeling
13950 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13954 \begin_inset space ~
13959 This is text with Double underbar on.
13963 arg "font-underunderline"
13967 \begin_inset Newline newline
13970 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13971 about double underbar.
13974 \begin_layout Labeling
13975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13979 \begin_inset space ~
13984 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13988 arg "font-underwave"
13992 \begin_inset Newline newline
13995 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13996 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13999 \begin_layout Labeling
14000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14007 This is text with Strikeout on.
14013 arg "font-strikeout"
14017 \begin_inset Newline newline
14020 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has since
14024 \begin_layout Labeling
14025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14032 This is text with Noun on.
14039 , this is a logical attribute.
14040 Normally it's equivalent to
14043 \begin_inset space ~
14052 \begin_layout Labeling
14053 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14058 You can adjust the color of the text with this control.
14059 Notice that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14063 \begin_inset space ~
14068 , which is the default
14069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14076 and means normally black, you can choose between
14109 \begin_inset Index idx
14112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14121 \begin_layout Labeling
14122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14127 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14128 the language of the document.
14129 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14130 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14132 \begin_inset Newline newline
14135 If you have for example a longer German Text in your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
14137 the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14138 When using the spell checking (see section
14139 \begin_inset space ~
14143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14145 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14149 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary
14152 \begin_layout Standard
14153 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14154 Once you've chosen a new character style via the
14156 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14163 dialog, the settings are saved.
14164 You can activate them using the toolbar button
14167 arg "textstyle-apply"
14171 The button lets you toggle the state of your custom character style even
14172 when the dialog isn't visible.
14176 \begin_layout Standard
14177 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14184 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14185 (suppose you just set the shape to
14186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14204 \begin_inset space ~
14216 \begin_layout Standard
14217 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14225 \begin_inset space ~
14237 \begin_layout Itemize
14243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14250 font, that means every character has the same width, the
14251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14268 \begin_inset Newline newline
14272 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14286 \begin_inset Note Note
14289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14290 For more on phantoms see section
14291 \begin_inset space ~
14295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14297 reference "subsec:More-Spaces"
14307 \begin_inset Newline newline
14313 \begin_layout Itemize
14318 fonts use characters with serifs.
14319 These are the small
14320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14327 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14328 The following example will show the difference:
14329 \begin_inset Newline newline
14333 \begin_inset Newline newline
14338 text without serifs
14341 \begin_inset Newline newline
14344 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14345 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14352 \begin_layout Itemize
14358 This font type is therefore often used for headings and short texts.
14359 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14362 \begin_layout Standard
14363 We conclude with the same warning once again: Don't overuse the fonts.
14364 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14367 \begin_layout Section
14368 Printing and Previewing
14371 \begin_layout Subsection
14375 \begin_layout Standard
14376 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14377 using \SpecialChar LyX
14378 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14379 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14380 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14381 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14383 Additional Features
14388 \begin_layout Standard
14390 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
14393 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
14394 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
14395 we'll only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
14398 is what you use to do your actual writing.
14399 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
14400 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
14401 to turn your writing into printable output.
14402 This happens in two stages:
14405 \begin_layout Enumerate
14406 First, \SpecialChar LyX
14407 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
14409 a file with the extension,
14410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14424 \begin_layout Enumerate
14425 Next, \SpecialChar LaTeX
14426 uses the commands in the
14430 file to produce printable output.
14434 \begin_layout Subsection
14435 Output file formats
14436 \begin_inset Index idx
14439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14448 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
14455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14457 \begin_inset Index idx
14460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14461 File formats ! ASCII
14469 \begin_layout Standard
14470 This file type has the extension
14471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14483 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14487 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14494 \begin_layout Standard
14495 You can export your document to ASCII by the menu
14497 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14498 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14507 \begin_inset Index idx
14510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14511 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
14520 \begin_layout Standard
14521 This file type has the extension
14522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14533 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14536 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
14537 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
14538 -Errors or to process it manually
14539 with console commands.
14540 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
14541 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
14542 's temporary directory whenever you
14543 view or export your document.
14546 \begin_layout Standard
14547 You can export your document as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14548 -file using the menu
14550 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14551 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14570 \begin_inset Index idx
14573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14582 \begin_layout Standard
14583 This file type has the extension
14584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14604 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14605 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14606 DVIs are used for quick previews and as pre-stage for other output formats,
14610 \begin_layout Standard
14611 DVI files do not contain images, they only link them.
14612 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14613 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the image in the background to make
14614 it visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer when
14616 So we recommend to use PDF for files with many images.
14619 \begin_layout Standard
14620 You can export your document to DVI by the menu
14622 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14623 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14631 \begin_inset Index idx
14634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14635 File formats ! PostScript
14643 \begin_layout Standard
14644 This file type has the extension
14645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14657 PostScript was developed by the company
14661 as a printer language.
14662 The file contains therefore commands that the printer uses to print the
14664 PostScript can be seen as a
14665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14668 programming language
14669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14672 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14677 When you are interested to learn more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14684 \begin_inset Index idx
14687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14689 -packages ! pstricks
14699 Due to this ability, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14702 \begin_layout Standard
14703 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14707 Encapsulated PostScript
14708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14711 (EPS, file extension
14712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14724 As \SpecialChar LyX
14725 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
14726 convert them in the background to EPS.
14728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14731 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
14733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14736 conversions whenever you view or export your document.
14737 This will slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
14739 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14740 EPS to avoid this problem.
14743 \begin_layout Standard
14744 You can export your document to PostScript using the menu
14746 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14747 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14755 \begin_inset Index idx
14758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14765 \begin_inset Index idx
14768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14777 \begin_layout Standard
14778 This file type has the extension
14779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14795 Portable Document Format
14796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14803 was derived from PostScript.
14804 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14813 implies, it can be processed at any computer system and the printed output
14814 looks exactly the same.
14817 \begin_layout Standard
14818 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14822 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14826 (JPG, file extension
14827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14854 Portable Network Graphics
14855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14858 (PNG, file extension
14859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14871 You can although use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
14873 the background to one of these formats.
14874 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14875 will slow down your workflow.
14876 So we recommend to use images in one of the three mentioned formats.
14879 \begin_layout Standard
14880 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14882 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14885 in three different ways:
14888 \begin_layout Description
14889 PDF This uses the program
14893 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14894 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14898 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14899 So this export variant consist of three conversions.
14902 \begin_layout Description
14904 \begin_inset space ~
14907 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14911 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14915 \begin_layout Description
14917 \begin_inset space ~
14920 (pdflatex) This uses the program pdftex that converts your file directly
14924 \begin_layout Description
14926 \begin_inset space ~
14933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14940 X) This uses the program Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14941 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14943 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for
14944 direct font access (see section
14945 \begin_inset space ~
14949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14951 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14956 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts.
14959 \begin_layout Description
14961 \begin_inset space ~
14968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14975 X) This uses the program Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14976 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14977 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14978 is an even newer engine, derived from pdflatex, that also provides
14979 direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
14980 \begin_inset space ~
14984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14986 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14991 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14992 is still work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
14997 \begin_layout Standard
14998 We recommend to use
15001 \begin_inset space ~
15010 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15011 works without problems.
15016 is no longer under development and therefore a bit outdated.
15019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15021 \begin_inset Index idx
15024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15025 FileFormats ! XHTML
15031 \begin_inset Index idx
15034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15043 \begin_layout Standard
15044 This file type has the extension
15045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15057 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15058 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links them, and
15059 when \SpecialChar LyX
15060 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15061 suitable for the purpose.
15062 Math is output as MathML, which renders nicely in browsers that support
15063 it, but not all do.
15066 \begin_layout Standard
15067 XHTML output remains
15068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15075 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15076 features are supported yet.
15078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15082 and the World Wide Web
15083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15088 Additional Features
15090 manual, for more information.
15093 \begin_layout Standard
15094 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15096 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15097 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15104 \begin_layout Subsection
15106 \begin_inset Index idx
15109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15118 \begin_layout Standard
15121 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15122 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15131 or use the toolbar button
15138 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15139 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15146 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15150 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15158 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15163 Further output formats can be selected via
15165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15166 View (Other Formats)
15168 or the toolbar button
15169 \begin_inset Graphics
15170 filename ../../images/view-others.svgz
15172 groupId toolbarbuttons
15179 \begin_layout Standard
15182 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15183 viewer window using the menu
15185 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15191 Update (Other Formats)
15196 \begin_layout Standard
15199 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15202 To have a real output, export your document.
15205 \begin_layout Section
15206 A few Words about Typography
15207 \begin_inset Index idx
15210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15219 \begin_layout Subsection
15221 \begin_inset Index idx
15224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15233 \begin_layout Standard
15234 In \SpecialChar LyX
15236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15247 character comes in four lengths: the
15259 , and the minus sign:
15260 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15266 \begin_layout Standard
15267 \begin_inset Tabular
15268 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15269 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
15270 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15271 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15272 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15273 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15302 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15342 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15369 \begin_inset space ~
15372 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15379 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15404 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15406 \begin_inset space ~
15409 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15430 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15464 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15470 \begin_layout Standard
15471 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15483 character multiple times in a row.
15484 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15485 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
15488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15518 \begin_layout Standard
15519 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15520 math mode and has a length of its own.
15521 Here are some examples of the
15522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15536 \begin_layout Enumerate
15537 line- and page-breaks
15538 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15548 \begin_layout Enumerate
15550 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15560 \begin_layout Enumerate
15561 Oh — there's a dash.
15562 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15572 \begin_layout Enumerate
15573 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15577 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15587 \begin_layout Subsection
15589 \begin_inset Index idx
15592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15601 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
15608 \begin_layout Standard
15609 Words aren't hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
15610 but automatically in the output.
15611 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15617 \begin_inset Index idx
15620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15627 following the rules of the document language
15631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15632 For German readers: That's one of the main differences between the languages
15640 \begin_inset space ~
15644 \begin_inset space ~
15651 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15662 \begin_layout Standard
15664 hyphenates almost perfectly, it only has problems with text in the
15668 font and with unusual constructs, like
15669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15677 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
15678 can't break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
15679 This is done with the menu
15681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15682 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15684 \begin_inset space ~
15690 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15692 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
15696 \begin_layout Standard
15697 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15698 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15709 would then see the hyphen
15710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15717 as a hyphenation possibility.
15718 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15719 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15720 as described in section
15721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15724 Prevent Hyphenation
15725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15735 \begin_layout Subsection
15737 \begin_inset Index idx
15740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15750 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15753 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
15760 \begin_layout Standard
15761 When \SpecialChar LyX
15762 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15763 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
15765 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15771 appropriate amount of space
15772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15776 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15778 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period as a word uses.
15781 \begin_layout Standard
15782 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15783 not work in all cases.
15785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15796 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15797 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15800 \begin_layout Standard
15801 Here are some examples of
15805 abbreviations and the end of a sentence:
15808 \begin_layout Itemize
15813 \begin_layout Itemize
15818 \begin_layout Standard
15819 And here's an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15822 \begin_layout Itemize
15824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15828 this is too much space!
15831 \begin_layout Itemize
15836 \begin_layout Standard
15837 You won't see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15840 \begin_layout Standard
15841 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15844 \begin_layout Enumerate
15848 \begin_inset space ~
15853 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15854 \begin_inset space ~
15858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15860 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
15865 \begin_inset Index idx
15868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15869 Spaces ! inter-word
15877 \begin_layout Enumerate
15881 \begin_inset space ~
15886 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15887 \begin_inset space ~
15891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15893 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
15898 \begin_inset Index idx
15901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15910 \begin_layout Enumerate
15914 \begin_inset space ~
15918 \begin_inset space ~
15922 \begin_inset space ~
15929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15931 \begin_inset space ~
15936 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15937 This function is also bound to
15940 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15946 \begin_layout Standard
15947 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15950 \begin_layout Itemize
15952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15956 \begin_inset space \space{}
15959 this is too much space!
15962 \begin_layout Itemize
15963 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
15967 \begin_layout Standard
15968 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15969 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
15971 will take care of this.
15974 \begin_layout Standard
15975 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
15979 \begin_inset space ~
15985 feature described in section
15987 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
15992 Additional Features
15997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15999 \begin_inset Index idx
16002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16003 Typography ! Quotes
16009 \begin_inset Index idx
16012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16043 \begin_layout Standard
16045 usually sets quotes correctly.
16046 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16047 and use a closing quote at the end.
16049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16057 The keyboard character,
16061 , generates this automatically.
16064 \begin_layout Standard
16065 You can change the behavior of the
16069 key using the submenu
16075 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16079 \begin_inset Index idx
16082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 Document ! Settings
16091 \begin_layout Standard
16092 You can also select quotes for different languages in the box
16097 There are six choices:
16100 \begin_layout Labeling
16101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16113 Use quotes like this
16114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16122 \begin_inset Quotes els
16126 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16132 \begin_layout Labeling
16133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16136 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16140 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16146 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16150 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16154 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16160 \begin_layout Labeling
16161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16164 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16168 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16174 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16178 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16182 \begin_inset Quotes gls
16186 \begin_inset Quotes grs
16192 \begin_layout Labeling
16193 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16196 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16200 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16206 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16210 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16214 \begin_inset Quotes pls
16218 \begin_inset Quotes prs
16224 \begin_layout Labeling
16225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16228 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16232 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16238 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16242 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16246 \begin_inset Quotes fls
16250 \begin_inset Quotes frs
16256 \begin_layout Labeling
16257 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16260 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16264 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16270 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16274 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16278 \begin_inset Quotes als
16282 \begin_inset Quotes ars
16288 \begin_layout Standard
16289 These settings affect what character the
16296 \begin_layout Subsection
16298 \begin_inset Index idx
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16302 Typography ! Ligatures
16308 \begin_inset Index idx
16311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16342 name "subsec:Ligatures"
16349 \begin_layout Standard
16350 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16351 print them as single characters.
16352 These groups are known as
16357 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
16358 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
16360 Here are the standard ligatures:
16363 \begin_layout Itemize
16367 \begin_layout Itemize
16371 \begin_layout Itemize
16375 \begin_layout Itemize
16379 \begin_layout Itemize
16383 \begin_layout Standard
16384 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16387 \begin_layout Standard
16388 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16389 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16397 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16413 To break a ligature, use
16415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16416 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16418 \begin_inset space ~
16425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16436 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
16438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16453 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
16455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16461 \begin_layout Subsection
16463 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
16465 \begin_inset Index idx
16468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16480 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16487 \begin_layout Standard
16490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16494 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
16497 \begin_layout Description
16499 The name of the game.
16502 \begin_layout Description
16504 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
16508 \begin_layout Description
16510 The \SpecialChar TeX
16511 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
16515 \begin_layout Description
16516 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
16517 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16521 \begin_layout Standard
16522 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16528 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16536 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
16537 world to give programs geek version numbers.
16538 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
16539 converges to the number
16540 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16543 : The actual version is
16544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16552 , the previous one was
16553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16564 \begin_layout Subsection
16566 \begin_inset Index idx
16569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16578 \begin_layout Standard
16579 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16580 space between two words.
16581 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16591 for units use the menu
16593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16594 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16596 \begin_inset space ~
16604 arg "space-insert thin"
16610 \begin_layout Standard
16611 Here's an example to show the differences:
16614 \begin_layout Standard
16615 \begin_inset Tabular
16616 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16617 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16618 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16619 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16626 \begin_inset space ~
16630 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16642 space between number and unit
16649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16658 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16670 half space between number and unit
16683 \begin_layout Subsection
16685 \begin_inset Index idx
16688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16689 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16697 \begin_layout Standard
16698 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16700 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16701 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16702 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16703 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16704 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16705 These bits of text became known as
16716 \begin_layout Standard
16717 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
16718 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16719 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16720 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16721 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16722 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
16723 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there to
16724 specifically prevent widows and orphans.
16725 This is the advantage \SpecialChar LyX
16726 has in using \SpecialChar LaTeX
16730 \begin_layout Standard
16731 There's no way we can go into how \SpecialChar TeX
16732 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
16733 decide to break a page, or how you
16734 can tweak that behavior.
16735 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
16736 books listed in the bibliography [such as
16737 \begin_inset space ~
16741 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16743 key "latexcompanion"
16748 \begin_inset space ~
16752 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16758 ] may have more information.
16759 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16762 \begin_layout Chapter
16763 Notes, Graphics, Tables, and Floats
16764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16766 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16773 \begin_layout Standard
16774 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16779 There you'll also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16782 \begin_layout Section
16784 \begin_inset Index idx
16787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16803 \begin_layout Standard
16805 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16808 \begin_layout Description
16811 \begin_inset space ~
16814 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16815 \begin_inset Newline newline
16819 \begin_inset Note Note
16822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16823 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16831 \begin_layout Description
16832 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it appears as \SpecialChar LaTeX
16834 when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16837 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16838 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16847 \begin_inset Newline newline
16851 \begin_inset Note Comment
16854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16855 This is text in a note box that only appears as comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
16864 \begin_layout Description
16866 \begin_inset space ~
16869 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16870 set in the document settings under
16872 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
16874 \begin_inset space ~
16880 \begin_inset Newline newline
16884 \begin_inset Newline newline
16888 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16897 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
16898 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
16903 of a comment that appears in the output.
16909 \begin_inset Newline newline
16913 \begin_inset Newline newline
16916 As you can see in the example, the first line of greyed out notes is a bit
16917 indented and greyed out notes can have footnotes.
16920 \begin_layout Standard
16921 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
16929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16933 Right-click on the appearing note box to select the note type.
16936 \begin_layout Section
16938 \begin_inset Index idx
16941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16950 name "sec:Footnotes"
16957 \begin_layout Standard
16959 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
16962 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16965 or the toolbar button
16968 arg "footnote-insert"
16980 \begin_inset Graphics
16981 filename ../clipart/footnoteQt4.png
16990 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
16991 's representation of your footnote.
17001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17020 label, the box will
17024 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17025 Clicking on the box label again, will close
17038 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply mark it and click
17054 \begin_layout Standard
17055 Here is an example footnote:
17063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17064 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17072 \begin_layout Standard
17073 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17074 position where the footnote box is placed.
17075 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17076 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17078 The numbers are consecutive, no matter in which chapter the footnote is
17081 doesn't support other numbering schemes yet, but you can get other schemes
17082 using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17088 ey are described in the
17095 \begin_layout Section
17097 \begin_inset Index idx
17100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17109 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17116 \begin_layout Standard
17117 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17119 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17123 \begin_inset space ~
17128 or the toolbar button
17131 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17134 , you will see a box with the label
17135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17142 appearing within your text.
17143 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17144 's representation of your marginal note.
17147 \begin_layout Standard
17148 At the side is an example marginal note.
17149 \begin_inset Marginal
17152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17153 This is a marginal note.
17161 \begin_layout Standard
17162 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17163 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17164 pages, right on odd pages.
17167 \begin_layout Standard
17168 For further information about marginal notes see section
17171 \begin_inset space ~
17179 \begin_inset space ~
17187 \begin_layout Section
17188 Graphics and Images
17189 \begin_inset Index idx
17192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17199 \begin_inset Index idx
17202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17211 name "sec:Graphics"
17218 \begin_layout Standard
17219 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17220 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17223 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17232 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17235 \begin_layout Standard
17236 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17241 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17242 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17244 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17245 \begin_inset space ~
17249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17251 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
17258 \begin_layout Standard
17263 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17264 of the image in the output.
17265 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17269 \begin_inset space ~
17273 \begin_inset space ~
17282 \begin_inset space ~
17286 \begin_inset space ~
17290 \begin_inset space ~
17295 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17296 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17304 \begin_layout Standard
17308 and \SpecialChar LyX
17311 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
17312 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
17314 You can also specify here the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
17319 \begin_inset space ~
17324 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17325 with the image size is printed.
17328 \begin_layout Standard
17329 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17330 The image will appear in the output exactly at the position where it is
17332 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17334 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
17340 \begin_layout Standard
17342 \begin_inset Graphics
17343 filename ../clipart/mobius.eps
17345 rotateOrigin center
17352 \begin_layout Standard
17353 If you need image captions and want to reference images, you have to put
17354 the image into a float, see section
17355 \begin_inset space ~
17359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17361 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
17368 \begin_layout Subsection
17370 \begin_inset Index idx
17373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17382 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
17389 \begin_layout Standard
17390 You can insert images in any known file format.
17391 But as we explained in section
17392 \begin_inset space ~
17396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17398 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17402 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17404 uses therefore the program
17408 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17409 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17410 you can use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17411 \begin_inset space ~
17415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17417 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17424 \begin_layout Standard
17425 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17428 \begin_layout Description
17430 \begin_inset space ~
17433 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17434 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17435 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17439 Graphics Interchange Format
17440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17443 (GIF, file extension
17444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17456 \begin_inset Index idx
17459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17491 Portable Network Graphics
17492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17495 (PNG, file extension
17496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17508 \begin_inset Index idx
17511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17543 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17547 (JPG, file extension
17548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17572 \begin_inset Index idx
17575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17606 \begin_layout Description
17608 \begin_inset space ~
17611 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17613 The scaling ability is necessary if you want to create presentations, because
17614 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17615 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17616 \begin_inset Newline newline
17619 Scalable image formats can be
17620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17623 Scalable Vector Graphics
17624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17627 (SVG, file extension
17628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17640 \begin_inset Index idx
17643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17675 Encapsulated PostScript
17676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17679 (EPS, file extension
17680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17692 \begin_inset Index idx
17695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17727 Portable Document Format
17728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17731 (PDF, file extension
17732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17744 \begin_inset Index idx
17747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17754 We say it can be, because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF
17755 or EPS and the result won't be scalable.
17756 In this cases only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17762 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17770 \begin_layout Standard
17771 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only vice
17775 \begin_layout Subsection
17776 Grouping of Image Settings
17777 \begin_inset Index idx
17780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17781 Images ! Settings grouping
17789 \begin_layout Standard
17790 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17792 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17793 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17795 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17796 need to manually change each of them.
17800 \begin_layout Standard
17801 A new group can be set by entering a name in the
17804 \begin_inset space ~
17809 field in the Graphics dialog.
17810 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
17811 by checking the name of the desired group.
17814 \begin_layout Section
17816 \begin_inset Index idx
17819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17835 \begin_layout Standard
17836 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
17839 arg "tabular-insert"
17844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17848 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
17849 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
17850 from the rest of the table.
17851 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
17852 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
17854 Here's an example table:
17855 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
17861 \begin_layout Standard
17863 \begin_inset Tabular
17864 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
17865 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17866 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17867 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17868 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
17869 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18069 \begin_layout Subsection
18073 \begin_layout Standard
18074 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button, which
18075 brings up the table dialog.
18076 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell and row/column respectively
18077 where the cursor is placed currently.
18078 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18079 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18080 done on all of your selection.
18083 \begin_layout Standard
18084 Additionally to the table dialog, the
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18092 helps you in setting table properties.
18093 It appears when the cursor is inside a table.
18096 \begin_layout Standard
18100 \begin_inset space ~
18105 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18106 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18107 current cell respectively.
18108 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18110 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18111 of text, see section
18112 \begin_inset space ~
18116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18118 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18125 \begin_layout Standard
18126 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18127 using the check box
18136 This will merge the cells to
18140 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18141 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18142 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18143 Here's an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18144 in the last row without the upper border:
18145 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
18151 \begin_layout Standard
18153 \begin_inset Tabular
18154 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18155 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18156 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18157 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18170 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18179 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18255 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18290 \begin_layout Standard
18291 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18292 -arguments for the table.
18293 They are necessary for special table formatting, like for multirow cells,
18294 explained in the tables section of the
18297 \begin_inset space ~
18303 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18307 degrees counterclockwise.
18308 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18312 \begin_layout Standard
18313 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18321 Most DVI-viewers are
18325 able to display rotations.
18333 \begin_layout Standard
18338 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18343 adds lines for all cell borders.
18346 \begin_layout Subsection
18348 \begin_inset Index idx
18351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18352 Tables ! Longtables
18358 \begin_inset Index idx
18361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18370 \begin_layout Standard
18371 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18374 \begin_inset space ~
18378 \begin_inset space ~
18387 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18388 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18391 \begin_layout Description
18396 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18397 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable;
18398 except for the first page, if
18401 \begin_inset space ~
18409 \begin_layout Description
18413 \begin_inset space ~
18418 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18419 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18422 \begin_layout Description
18427 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18428 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable;
18429 except for the last page, if
18432 \begin_inset space ~
18440 \begin_layout Description
18444 \begin_inset space ~
18449 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18450 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18453 \begin_layout Description
18454 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18455 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18457 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18461 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18464 \begin_inset space ~
18472 \begin_layout Standard
18473 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18474 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18475 of the fact that only the first one is used in the given table row.
18476 The others will then be defined as
18481 In this context, first means first in this order:
18484 \begin_inset space ~
18496 \begin_inset space ~
18502 See the following longtable to see how it works:
18503 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
18509 \begin_layout Standard
18511 \begin_inset Tabular
18512 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18513 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18514 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18515 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18516 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18517 <row endfirsthead="true">
18518 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18524 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18529 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18538 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18548 <row endfirsthead="true">
18549 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18560 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18569 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18581 <row endhead="true">
18582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18593 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18602 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18612 <row endhead="true">
18613 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18624 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18633 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18645 <row endfoot="true">
18646 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18657 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18666 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18697 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19638 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19647 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20504 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 <row endlastfoot="true">
20628 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 \begin_layout Subsection
20667 \begin_inset Index idx
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20679 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
20686 \begin_layout Standard
20687 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20688 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20689 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20690 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20694 , etc.), nor set spacing options etc.
20695 for the cell's paragraph.
20698 \begin_layout Standard
20699 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20700 for the column in the table dialog.
20701 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20702 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20704 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
20710 \begin_layout Standard
20712 \begin_inset Tabular
20713 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20714 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20715 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20716 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20717 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20737 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20806 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20862 This is longer now.
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20919 This is longer now.
20924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20950 \begin_layout Standard
20951 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
20952 You can cut and paste even more than one row.
20956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 Note, that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would
20958 not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
20964 Selection with the mouse or with
20968 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
20969 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
20970 the selection from outside the table.
20973 \begin_layout Section
20975 \begin_inset Index idx
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20994 \begin_layout Subsection
20998 \begin_layout Standard
20999 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21000 have a fixed location.
21002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21009 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21017 \begin_inset space ~
21022 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21023 too many notes on the page.
21026 \begin_layout Standard
21027 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21028 Images and tables can be spread evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21029 and pages without text.
21030 As the floating often destroys the context between the text and the image/table
21031 , every float can be referenced in the text.
21032 Floats are therefore numbered.
21033 Referencing is described in section
21034 \begin_inset space ~
21038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21040 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21047 \begin_layout Standard
21048 To insert a float, use the menu
21050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21054 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21055 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21057 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21058 \begin_inset Index idx
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21070 paragraph within the float.
21071 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21072 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21073 left-clicking on the box label.
21074 A closed float box looks like this:
21075 \begin_inset Graphics
21076 filename ../clipart/floatQt4.png
21081 – a gray button with a red label.
21084 \begin_layout Standard
21085 It is recommended to insert floats as a separate paragraph to avoid possible
21087 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21090 \begin_layout Subsection
21094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21098 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21103 \begin_inset Index idx
21106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21109 Floats ! Figure floats
21117 \begin_layout Standard
21119 \begin_inset space ~
21123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21125 reference "cap:Platypus"
21129 was created using the menu
21131 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21132 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21135 or the toolbar button
21138 arg "float-insert figure"
21142 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21148 or the toolbar button
21151 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21155 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21156 in front of or behind the image and using the menu
21158 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21160 \begin_inset space ~
21165 or the toolbar button
21168 arg "layout-paragraph"
21174 \begin_layout Standard
21175 \begin_inset Float figure
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 \begin_inset Graphics
21183 filename ../clipart/platypus.eps
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21198 name "cap:Platypus"
21202 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21215 \begin_layout Standard
21216 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21218 As described in section
21219 \begin_inset space ~
21223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21225 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21229 , you can simply insert a label in the caption using the menu
21231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21234 or the toolbar button
21240 and refer to it using the menu
21242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21245 or the toolbar button
21248 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21252 It is important to use references to figure floats, rather than using vague
21254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21261 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
21262 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
21264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21274 \begin_layout Standard
21275 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21276 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21277 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21278 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21279 as described in section
21280 \begin_inset space ~
21284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21286 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
21292 \begin_inset space ~
21296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21298 reference "cap:Two-distorted-images"
21302 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21303 You can also set the images one below the other.
21305 \begin_inset space ~
21309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21311 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21318 reference "fig:Platypus"
21322 are the subfigures.
21325 \begin_layout Standard
21326 \begin_inset Float figure
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21336 \begin_inset Float figure
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21342 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21349 name "fig:Undefinable"
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21362 \begin_inset Graphics
21363 filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21374 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21378 \begin_inset Float figure
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21384 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21391 name "fig:Platypus"
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 \begin_inset Graphics
21405 filename ../clipart/platypus.eps
21417 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21424 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21429 name "cap:Two-distorted-images"
21433 Two distorted images.
21446 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21448 \begin_inset Index idx
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 Floats ! Table floats
21462 \begin_layout Standard
21463 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21466 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21469 or the toolbar botton
21472 arg "float-insert table"
21476 They have the same properties as figure floats except for the different
21479 \begin_inset space ~
21483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21485 reference "cap:Table-float"
21492 \begin_layout Standard
21493 \begin_inset Float table
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21504 name "cap:Table-float"
21516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 \begin_inset Tabular
21519 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21520 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21521 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21522 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21523 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21587 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21599 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21602 \end{array}\right]$
21610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21635 \begin_layout Subsection
21637 \begin_inset Index idx
21640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 \begin_layout Standard
21653 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21654 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21655 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21657 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in chapter
21665 \begin_inset space ~
21673 \begin_layout Section
21675 \begin_inset Index idx
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21687 name "sec:Minipages"
21694 \begin_layout Standard
21696 provides a mechanism to produce essentially a page within a page, called
21698 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21699 \begin_inset space ~
21706 \begin_layout Standard
21707 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
21708 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21714 Right-clicking on the box allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21715 and its alignment within the page.
21716 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
21722 \begin_layout Standard
21724 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21734 height_special "totalheight"
21739 backgroundcolor "none"
21742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 This is a minipage.
21746 The text is set in an italic style.
21749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21752 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
21753 another formatting.
21761 \begin_layout Standard
21762 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21765 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
21769 as described in section
21770 \begin_inset space ~
21774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21776 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
21781 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21787 \begin_layout Standard
21788 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21798 height_special "totalheight"
21803 backgroundcolor "none"
21806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21807 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21808 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21814 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21818 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21828 height_special "totalheight"
21833 backgroundcolor "none"
21836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21838 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21846 \begin_layout Standard
21847 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
21853 \begin_layout Standard
21854 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can change the box from a minipage
21855 to other box types.
21856 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
21867 \begin_layout Chapter
21868 Mathematical Formulas
21869 \begin_inset Index idx
21872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 \begin_inset Index idx
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21913 name "cha:Mathematical-Formulas"
21920 \begin_layout Standard
21921 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21926 There you'll also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21929 \begin_layout Section
21931 \begin_inset Index idx
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21943 \begin_layout Standard
21944 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
21951 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
21953 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
21954 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
21955 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
21957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21963 \begin_layout Standard
21964 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
21968 \begin_inset space ~
21973 , that appears when the cursor is in a formula.
21976 \begin_layout Standard
21977 There are two main types of formulas: Inline formulas appear within a text
21978 line, like this one:
21981 \begin_layout Standard
21982 This is a line with an inline formula
21983 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
21989 \begin_layout Standard
21990 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in an own paragraph
21992 \begin_inset Formula
21999 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22002 \begin_layout Standard
22004 supports also many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22011 \begin_inset space \space{}
22015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22028 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22029 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22033 So typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22036 \begin_inset space ~
22044 \begin_layout Subsection
22045 Navigating in Formulas
22046 \begin_inset Index idx
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22058 \begin_layout Standard
22059 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22060 achieved with the arrow keys.
22062 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22063 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22068 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22069 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22073 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22077 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22080 \end{array}\right]$
22088 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22093 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22094 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22097 \begin_layout Standard
22102 , printed in this document as
22103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22124 \begin_inset Note Note
22127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 This command will appear in the output as official character denoting the
22129 space character (visible space).
22134 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22135 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22136 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22141 For example, if you want
22142 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 , since in the latter case only the
22199 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22204 will be under the square root sign:
22205 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22211 \begin_layout Standard
22212 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22214 \begin_inset Formula
22216 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22225 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22226 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22229 \begin_layout Subsection
22233 \begin_layout Standard
22234 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22235 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22239 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22240 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22241 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22242 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22243 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
22247 \begin_layout Subsection
22248 Exponents and Subscripts
22249 \begin_inset Index idx
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22259 \begin_inset Index idx
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 \begin_layout Standard
22272 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22275 arg "math-superscript"
22281 arg "math-subscript"
22284 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22286 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22289 , type in a formula
22292 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22302 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22308 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22312 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22318 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22324 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22333 , you have to use an extra
22337 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22338 For example, if you want
22339 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22345 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22351 Subscripts are similar: To get
22352 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22358 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22366 \begin_layout Subsection
22368 \begin_inset Index idx
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 \begin_layout Standard
22381 Create a fraction with either the command
22390 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22396 \begin_inset space ~
22402 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22403 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22404 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22409 To move back up, press
22414 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22415 \begin_inset Formula
22417 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22420 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22428 \begin_layout Subsection
22430 \begin_inset Index idx
22433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 \begin_layout Standard
22443 Roots can be created using the
22446 \begin_inset space ~
22454 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22460 arg "math-insert \\root"
22482 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22488 always produces a square root.
22491 \begin_layout Subsection
22492 Operators with Limits
22493 \begin_inset Index idx
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22505 \begin_inset Index idx
22508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22519 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
22526 \begin_layout Standard
22528 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22532 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22535 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22536 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
22537 by entering them as you would enter a super-
22538 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22539 The sum operator will automatically place its
22540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22547 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22549 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22553 \begin_inset Formula
22555 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22560 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22564 \begin_layout Standard
22565 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22567 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22568 behind the operator and using the menu
22570 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22571 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
22573 \begin_inset space ~
22577 \begin_inset space ~
22591 \begin_layout Standard
22592 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
22593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22601 \begin_inset Index idx
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 \begin_inset Formula
22615 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22620 which will place the
22621 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22633 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22634 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22640 \begin_layout Standard
22641 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22648 Have a look at section
22649 \begin_inset space ~
22653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22655 reference "subsec:Functions"
22659 for an explanation of function macros.
22662 \begin_layout Subsection
22664 \begin_inset Index idx
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22678 \begin_layout Standard
22679 Most math symbols can be found in the
22682 \begin_inset space ~
22687 under one of several categories; including
22704 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22708 \begin_layout Standard
22709 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22710 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
22711 don't have to use the
22714 \begin_inset space ~
22719 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
22721 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22724 \begin_layout Subsection
22726 \begin_inset Index idx
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22740 \begin_layout Standard
22741 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
22747 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
22753 \begin_inset space ~
22761 arg "math-insert \\space"
22765 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
22766 For example, the sequence
22771 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
22774 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
22776 \begin_inset Graphics
22777 filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png
22782 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
22783 the space marker and enter space again several times.
22784 With every space enter the size will be changed.
22785 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
22786 , because they are negative
22788 Here are two examples:
22791 \begin_layout Standard
22801 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
22807 \begin_layout Standard
22817 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
22823 \begin_layout Subsection
22825 \begin_inset Index idx
22828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22839 name "subsec:Functions"
22846 \begin_layout Standard
22850 \begin_inset space ~
22855 contains under the button
22858 arg "math-insert \\functions"
22861 a number of function macros, such as
22862 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
22866 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
22874 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
22881 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
22882 avoid confusions, because
22883 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
22887 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
22893 \begin_layout Standard
22894 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
22896 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
22900 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
22906 \begin_layout Standard
22907 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
22908 are placed, as described in section
22909 \begin_inset space ~
22913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22915 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
22922 \begin_layout Subsection
22924 \begin_inset Index idx
22927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22938 \begin_layout Standard
22939 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
22941 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
22942 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
22943 commands, for example, to enter
22944 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
22947 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
22948 Our example is entered by typing
22953 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22960 \begin_inset space ~
22964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22966 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
22970 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
22973 \begin_layout Standard
22974 \begin_inset Float table
22979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22980 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22987 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
22991 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
22999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23001 \begin_inset Tabular
23002 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23003 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23004 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23005 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23006 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23063 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23135 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23171 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23207 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23279 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23315 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23351 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23408 \begin_layout Standard
23409 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23412 \begin_inset space ~
23420 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23423 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23427 \begin_layout Section
23428 Brackets and Delimiters
23429 \begin_inset Index idx
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 \begin_inset Index idx
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23455 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23462 \begin_layout Standard
23463 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
23465 For some purposes, using just the keys
23470 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23471 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23472 toolbar delimiter icon
23475 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23479 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
23480 \begin_inset Formula
23482 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23490 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23491 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23495 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23498 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23504 \begin_inset Formula
23506 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23514 \begin_layout Standard
23515 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23516 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23520 \begin_layout Standard
23521 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23522 left side and right side.
23523 If you use the option
23526 \begin_inset space ~
23531 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23532 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
23534 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
23539 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
23540 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23543 \begin_layout Standard
23544 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
23545 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
23546 is to go inside the brackets.
23547 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23552 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
23553 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
23554 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
23558 arg "math-delim ( )"
23564 \begin_layout Section
23565 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
23566 \begin_inset Index idx
23569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23578 \begin_inset Index idx
23581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23590 \begin_inset Index idx
23593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23596 Math ! Multi-line Equations
23604 \begin_layout Standard
23605 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23609 \begin_inset space ~
23617 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
23621 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
23622 Here is an example:
23623 \begin_inset Formula
23625 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23634 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
23635 \begin_inset space ~
23639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23641 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23646 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
23647 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
23648 This alignment is set in the box
23653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23702 for every column as default.
23703 For example, the sequence
23704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23715 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
23716 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
23717 corresponds to the relevant column.
23718 The result will look like this:
23719 \begin_inset Formula
23722 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
23723 column & has & has\,right\\
23724 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
23733 \begin_layout Standard
23734 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
23737 arg "newline-insert newline"
23740 while the cursor is in the matrix.
23741 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
23743 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23746 or the math toolbar.
23749 \begin_layout Standard
23750 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
23751 It can be created with the menu
23753 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23754 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23756 \begin_inset space ~
23768 Here is an example:
23769 \begin_inset Formula
23783 \begin_layout Standard
23784 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23787 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
23790 arg "newline-insert newline"
23794 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
23799 arg "newline-insert newline"
23802 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
23803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23810 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
23811 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
23812 A new row is created by every further entry of
23815 arg "newline-insert newline"
23819 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
23820 Here is an example:
23821 \begin_inset Formula
23823 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
23824 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
23829 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
23830 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
23831 \begin_inset Formula
23833 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
23841 \begin_layout Standard
23842 The multi-line formula type described here is called
23847 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
23848 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
23849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23851 reference "eq:asquared"
23856 The other types are described in section
23857 \begin_inset space ~
23861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23863 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
23870 \begin_layout Section
23871 Formula Numbering and Referencing
23872 \begin_inset Index idx
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23878 Math ! Formula numbering
23884 \begin_inset Index idx
23887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 Math ! Referencing formulas
23896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23898 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
23905 \begin_layout Standard
23906 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
23908 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23909 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23911 \begin_inset space ~
23915 \begin_inset space ~
23923 arg "math-number-toggle"
23927 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23928 within parentheses.
23929 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
23930 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
23931 the document class.
23932 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
23933 separated by a dot:
23934 \begin_inset Formula
23944 arg "math-number-toggle"
23947 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
23948 You can only number displayed formulas.
23951 \begin_layout Standard
23952 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
23954 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23955 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23957 \begin_inset space ~
23961 \begin_inset space ~
23969 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
23972 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
23973 \begin_inset Formula
23976 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
23982 To number all lines use the shortcut
23985 arg "math-number-toggle"
23991 \begin_layout Standard
23992 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23995 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
23996 A label is inserted with the menu
23998 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24007 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24008 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24009 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24021 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24022 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24023 We inserted in the following example the label
24024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24031 in the second line:
24032 \begin_inset Formula
24034 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24035 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24040 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24041 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24042 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24044 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24046 \begin_inset space ~
24054 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24058 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24059 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24060 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24061 as the formula number:
24064 \begin_layout Standard
24065 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24068 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24075 \begin_layout Standard
24076 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
24077 's cross-reference box are described in section
24078 \begin_inset space ~
24082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24084 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24089 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24097 \begin_layout Section
24098 User defined math macros
24099 \begin_inset Index idx
24102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24113 \begin_layout Standard
24115 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24116 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24117 Math macros are explained in section
24120 \begin_inset space ~
24132 \begin_layout Section
24136 \begin_layout Subsection
24138 \begin_inset Index idx
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 \begin_layout Standard
24153 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24154 To set a font in a formula, use the
24157 \begin_inset space ~
24165 arg "math-insert \\font"
24168 , or enter its command, listed in table
24169 \begin_inset space ~
24173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24175 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24182 \begin_layout Standard
24183 \begin_inset Float table
24188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24189 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24196 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24200 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 \begin_inset Tabular
24211 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24212 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24214 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24240 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24294 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24348 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24404 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24431 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24465 \begin_layout Standard
24466 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24474 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24490 \begin_layout Standard
24491 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24492 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24497 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24498 space when you need a space in the box.
24499 Here is an example where
24500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24511 denotes the set of numbers:
24512 \begin_inset Formula
24514 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
24522 \begin_layout Standard
24523 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24524 You can, for example, put a character in
24533 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24537 \begin_inset Newline newline
24540 So it is better not to use this feature.
24543 \begin_layout Standard
24544 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24545 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24549 \begin_inset Newline newline
24552 You can only print them emboldened using the command
24558 , which works like the other typeface commands:
24559 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
24565 \begin_layout Standard
24572 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
24575 \begin_layout Standard
24576 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
24578 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24579 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24581 \begin_inset space ~
24589 \begin_layout Subsection
24591 \begin_inset Index idx
24594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 \begin_layout Standard
24606 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
24608 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
24612 \begin_inset space ~
24616 \begin_inset space ~
24624 \begin_inset space ~
24632 arg "math-insert \\font"
24636 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24637 in black instead of blue.
24638 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
24639 Here is an example:
24640 \begin_inset Formula
24643 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
24644 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
24653 \begin_layout Subsection
24655 \begin_inset Index idx
24658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24669 \begin_layout Standard
24670 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
24671 automatically chosen in most situations.
24689 For most characters,
24697 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
24698 and certain other structures, are set larger in
24703 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
24704 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
24705 thinks are appropriate.
24706 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
24709 arg "math-insert \\style"
24713 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
24714 For example, you can set
24715 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
24718 , which is normally in
24727 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
24731 The four styles are used in the following example:
24734 \begin_layout Standard
24735 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
24739 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
24743 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
24747 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
24753 \begin_layout Standard
24754 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
24755 is set in a particular size with the menu
24757 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24759 \begin_inset space ~
24764 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
24765 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
24766 will be adjusted to correspond.
24767 As an example here is a formula in the font size
24768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24778 \begin_layout Standard
24781 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
24787 \begin_layout Section
24788 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
24790 \begin_inset Index idx
24793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24802 \begin_inset Index idx
24805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24816 \begin_layout Standard
24818 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
24819 that are in common use.
24822 \begin_layout Subsection
24823 Enabling AMS-Support
24826 \begin_layout Standard
24827 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
24828 the document by selecting the checkbox
24831 \begin_inset space ~
24835 \begin_inset space ~
24839 \begin_inset space ~
24846 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
24850 \begin_inset Index idx
24853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24856 Document ! Settings
24864 \begin_inset space ~
24870 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
24871 -errors in formulas,
24872 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
24875 \begin_layout Subsection
24877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24879 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24884 \begin_inset Index idx
24887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24890 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24898 \begin_layout Standard
24899 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
24900 provides a selection of different formula types.
24902 allows you to choose between
24923 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
24924 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24930 , for an explanation of these formula types.
24933 \begin_layout Chapter
24937 \begin_layout Section
24939 \begin_inset Index idx
24942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24953 name "sec:Cross-References"
24960 \begin_layout Standard
24961 One of \SpecialChar LyX
24962 's strengths is cross-references.
24963 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
24965 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
24966 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
24967 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
24970 \begin_layout Enumerate
24974 \begin_layout Enumerate
24975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24977 name "enu:Second-item"
24984 \begin_layout Enumerate
24988 \begin_layout Standard
24989 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
24991 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24994 or by pressing the toolbar button
25001 A gray label box like this:
25002 \begin_inset Graphics
25003 filename ../clipart/labelQt4.png
25008 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25010 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25045 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25046 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25062 \begin_layout Standard
25063 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25068 or the toolbar button
25071 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25075 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25076 \begin_inset Graphics
25077 filename ../clipart/referenceQt4.png
25082 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25084 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25097 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25101 \begin_layout Standard
25102 As an alternative to
25104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25107 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25112 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25113 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25115 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25127 \begin_layout Standard
25128 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25129 \begin_inset space ~
25133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25135 reference "enu:Second-item"
25142 \begin_layout Standard
25143 It is recommended to use a protected space
25147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25148 described in section
25149 \begin_inset space ~
25153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25155 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
25164 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25165 line breaks between them.
25168 \begin_layout Standard
25169 There are six formats of cross-references:
25172 \begin_layout Description
25173 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25176 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25183 \begin_layout Description
25184 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25185 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25197 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25204 \begin_layout Description
25205 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25206 \begin_inset space ~
25210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25211 LatexCommand pageref
25212 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25219 \begin_layout Description
25221 \begin_inset space ~
25225 \begin_inset space ~
25228 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25230 LatexCommand vpageref
25231 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25236 \begin_inset Newline newline
25239 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25240 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25241 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25242 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25243 it prints “on the next page”.
25244 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25247 \begin_layout Description
25249 \begin_inset space ~
25253 \begin_inset space ~
25257 \begin_inset space ~
25260 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25263 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25268 \begin_inset Newline newline
25271 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25277 ; otherwise it behaves like
25281 \begin_inset space ~
25285 \begin_inset space ~
25294 \begin_layout Description
25296 \begin_inset space ~
25299 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25300 \begin_inset Newline newline
25304 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25312 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25322 \begin_inset Index idx
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25329 -packages ! prettyref
25335 \begin_inset Index idx
25338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25342 -packages ! refstyle
25353 \begin_inset Newline newline
25356 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
25357 -package should be used for this feature by setting
25360 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25364 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25365 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25373 is the default and preferred because
25377 supports only English documents.
25378 The format is specified by using the command
25390 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25391 preamble of the document.
25392 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25405 ) can be done with this command
25406 \begin_inset Newline newline
25413 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25418 \begin_inset Newline newline
25421 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25423 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25425 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25432 \begin_layout Description
25434 \begin_inset space ~
25437 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25439 LatexCommand nameref
25440 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25447 \begin_layout Standard
25448 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25449 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
25451 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25455 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
25459 \begin_layout Standard
25460 You can only use the style
25464 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25468 is always possible.
25471 \begin_layout Standard
25472 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25473 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25475 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25476 \begin_inset space ~
25480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25482 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25489 \begin_layout Standard
25490 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25494 \begin_inset space ~
25498 \begin_inset space ~
25503 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25504 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25507 \begin_inset space ~
25512 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25513 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25516 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25522 \begin_layout Standard
25523 You can change labels at any time.
25524 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25525 do not need to think about this.
25528 \begin_layout Standard
25529 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
25531 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
25535 \begin_layout Standard
25536 References are described in detail in the section
25537 \begin_inset space ~
25541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25551 \begin_inset space ~
25559 \begin_layout Section
25560 Table of Contents and other Listings
25561 \begin_inset Index idx
25564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25573 \begin_inset Index idx
25576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25594 \begin_layout Subsection
25596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25598 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
25605 \begin_layout Standard
25606 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
25608 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25609 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
25611 \begin_inset space ~
25615 \begin_inset space ~
25621 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
25623 If you click on it, the
25627 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
25628 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
25629 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
25631 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
25633 \begin_inset space ~
25638 that is described in section
25639 \begin_inset space ~
25643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25645 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
25652 \begin_layout Standard
25653 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
25654 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
25656 \begin_inset space ~
25660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25662 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
25666 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
25668 \begin_inset space ~
25672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25674 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
25678 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
25680 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
25683 \begin_layout Subsection
25684 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
25685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25687 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25694 \begin_layout Standard
25695 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
25697 You can insert them via the
25699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25703 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
25706 \begin_layout Section
25707 URLs and Hyperlinks
25708 \begin_inset Index idx
25711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25720 \begin_inset Index idx
25723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 \begin_layout Subsection
25736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25745 \begin_layout Standard
25746 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
25748 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25754 \begin_layout Standard
25755 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
25757 \begin_inset Flex URL
25760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25770 \begin_layout Standard
25771 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
25777 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
25781 \begin_layout Standard
25782 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25790 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25799 \begin_layout Subsection
25801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25803 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
25810 \begin_layout Standard
25811 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
25813 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25816 or with the toolbar button
25823 The appearing dialog has two fields:
25832 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
25833 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
25834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25836 name "LyX's homepage"
25837 target "http://www.lyx.org"
25841 , an Email address like this:
25842 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25844 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
25845 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
25850 , or a link to a file.
25853 \begin_layout Standard
25854 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
25856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25867 to the link target.
25870 \begin_layout Standard
25871 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
25872 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
25873 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
25874 the text style dialog.
25875 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
25879 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25881 name "LyX's homepage"
25882 target "http://www.lyx.org"
25889 \begin_layout Standard
25890 The link text color can be changed, when the option
25894 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
25896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25897 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25901 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
25903 \begin_inset Newline newline
25911 \begin_inset Newline newline
25918 in the PDF Properties dialog.
25921 \begin_layout Section
25923 \begin_inset Index idx
25926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25937 name "sec:Appendices"
25944 \begin_layout Standard
25945 Appendices are created with the menu
25947 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25949 \begin_inset space ~
25953 \begin_inset space ~
25959 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
25960 as the appendix part of the book.
25961 This part is marked with a red borderline.
25964 \begin_layout Standard
25965 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
25966 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
25967 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
25968 and the subsection number.
25969 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
25973 \begin_layout Standard
25975 \begin_inset space ~
25979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25981 reference "chap:Credits"
25986 \begin_inset space ~
25990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25992 reference "subsec:Export"
25999 \begin_layout Section
26001 \begin_inset Index idx
26004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26015 name "sec:Bibliography"
26022 \begin_layout Standard
26023 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26025 You can include a bibliography database,
26029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26030 Known under the name
26031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26034 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26044 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26045 manually, using the paragraph environment
26049 , which was described in section
26050 \begin_inset space ~
26054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26056 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26061 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26062 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26066 use a bibliography database.
26069 \begin_layout Subsection
26070 The Bibliography Environment
26073 \begin_layout Standard
26078 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26080 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26089 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26091 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
26094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26101 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26104 \begin_layout Standard
26105 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26110 or the toolbar button
26113 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26117 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26118 containing the available citations.
26119 Select one or more keys from the list and
26129 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26130 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26134 \begin_layout Standard
26135 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26136 entry with surrounding brackets.
26141 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26142 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26154 \begin_layout Standard
26158 Companion Second Edition
26161 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26163 key "latexcompanion"
26170 \begin_layout Standard
26171 The \SpecialChar LyX
26172 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
26173 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26182 \begin_layout Standard
26183 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26186 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26188 \begin_inset space ~
26196 arg "layout-paragraph"
26200 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26203 \begin_layout Subsection
26204 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26206 \begin_inset Index idx
26209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26212 Bibliography ! Databases
26218 \begin_inset Index idx
26221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26224 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26233 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
26240 \begin_layout Standard
26241 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26247 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26249 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26250 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26255 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26257 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26258 your working field in a database.
26259 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26260 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26261 list for that document.
26262 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26266 \begin_layout Standard
26267 The database is a text file with the file extension
26268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26279 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26280 The format is explained in
26281 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26287 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26289 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26291 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26296 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26297 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26298 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
26300 \begin_inset Flex URL
26303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26305 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26313 \begin_layout Standard
26314 To use a database, use the menu
26316 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26321 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26323 \begin_inset space ~
26329 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26330 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26337 Add bibliography to TOC
26339 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26344 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26345 in the document or just the cited references.
26348 \begin_layout Standard
26349 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26361 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26362 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
26363 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26364 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26366 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26372 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26373 \begin_inset Newline newline
26377 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26379 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26391 \begin_layout Standard
26392 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26395 \begin_layout Standard
26396 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
26397 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26399 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
26406 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26407 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26412 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
26413 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
26414 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
26418 The following variants are possible:
26421 \begin_layout Description
26422 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26423 with other bibliography packages (e.
26424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26428 \begin_inset space \space{}
26435 ), only with the package
26439 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26443 \begin_layout Description
26444 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26445 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26446 with all bibliography packages, except
26451 \begin_layout Description
26452 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
26457 , works with all bibliography packages
26460 \begin_layout Standard
26461 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26462 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26464 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
26467 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26471 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26480 \begin_layout Standard
26481 When you select the option
26483 Sectioned bibliography
26487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26488 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26491 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26492 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26494 Customizing Bibliographies
26498 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26503 Additional Features
26508 \begin_layout Standard
26509 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26510 the two methods of creating them.
26511 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26512 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26513 We used the style file
26517 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26520 \begin_layout Subsection
26522 \begin_inset Index idx
26525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26528 Bibliography ! Citation format
26536 \begin_layout Standard
26537 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26538 For this feature you need to enable the option
26544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26548 \begin_inset Index idx
26551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26554 Document ! Settings
26564 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26565 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26566 style files as explained in
26567 the previous section.
26570 \begin_layout Standard
26571 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26572 the citation reference window.
26573 Here is an example where the text
26574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26578 \begin_inset space ~
26582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26585 appears after the reference:
26588 \begin_layout Standard
26590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26593 key "latexcompanion"
26600 \begin_layout Section
26602 \begin_inset Index idx
26605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26623 \begin_layout Standard
26624 An index entry is created if you use the menu
26626 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26628 \begin_inset space ~
26633 or the toolbar button
26640 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
26641 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
26642 by \SpecialChar LyX
26643 as the index entry.
26646 \begin_layout Standard
26647 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
26649 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26650 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26652 \begin_inset space ~
26658 A light blue box labeled
26659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26670 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
26671 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
26675 \begin_layout Standard
26676 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
26677 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
26678 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
26679 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26681 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26683 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
26690 \begin_layout Subsection
26691 Grouping Index Entries
26692 \begin_inset Index idx
26695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26706 \begin_layout Standard
26707 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
26709 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
26710 lists under the entry
26711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26719 First we create the entry
26720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26728 \begin_inset space ~
26732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26734 reference "subsec:Lists"
26739 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
26740 \begin_inset space ~
26744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26746 reference "sec:Itemize"
26750 , we insert the command
26753 \begin_layout Standard
26759 \begin_layout Standard
26763 \begin_layout Standard
26769 \begin_layout Standard
26770 for the enumerated list in section
26771 \begin_inset space ~
26775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26777 reference "sec:Enumerate"
26784 \begin_layout Standard
26785 The exclamation mark
26786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26793 marks the grouping levels.
26794 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
26795 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
26796 If we don't have an index entry for
26797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26804 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
26807 \begin_layout Subsection
26809 \begin_inset Index idx
26812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26815 Index ! Page ranges
26823 \begin_layout Standard
26824 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
26826 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
26827 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
26828 an index entry in section
26829 \begin_inset space ~
26833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26835 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
26842 \begin_layout Standard
26845 Paragraph environments|(
26848 \begin_layout Standard
26849 and another entry at the end of section
26850 \begin_inset space ~
26854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26856 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
26863 \begin_layout Standard
26866 Paragraph environments|)
26869 \begin_layout Standard
26871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26894 respectively start and end the index range.
26895 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
26896 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
26897 the pages of the indexed document parts.
26898 An example is the index entry
26899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26902 Document ! Settings
26903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26909 \begin_layout Subsection
26911 \begin_inset Index idx
26914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26917 Index ! Cross referencing
26925 \begin_layout Standard
26926 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
26927 We referred for example in the index entry
26928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26936 \begin_inset space ~
26940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26942 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
26946 ) to the index entry
26947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26954 in the same section using the entry
26957 \begin_layout Standard
26960 GIF|see{Image formats}
26963 \begin_layout Standard
26964 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
26966 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
26967 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
26970 \begin_layout Subsection
26972 \begin_inset Index idx
26975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26978 Index ! Entry order
26986 \begin_layout Standard
26987 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
26988 follow the rules for the index order.
26989 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
26994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26995 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
26997 \begin_inset space ~
27001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27003 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27012 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27013 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27038 \begin_inset Index idx
27041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27044 Dummy entries ! maïs
27050 \begin_inset Index idx
27053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27056 Dummy entries ! maître
27062 \begin_inset Index idx
27065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27068 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27073 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27074 maïs, maison, maître.
27075 To achieve this, we use the command
27078 \begin_layout Standard
27081 previous entry@current entry
27084 \begin_layout Standard
27085 In our case we want to have
27086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27101 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27104 \begin_layout Standard
27110 \begin_layout Standard
27111 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27112 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
27114 See the next subsection for an example.
27117 \begin_layout Standard
27118 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27124 \begin_layout Standard
27125 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27130 to generate the index (see sec.
27131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27137 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27146 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27147 -package aeguill in sec.
27148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27154 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
27158 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
27159 -packages although all these index
27160 commands start with
27161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27174 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27179 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27182 \begin_layout Standard
27194 \begin_layout Standard
27206 \begin_layout Subsection
27208 \begin_inset Index idx
27211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27214 Index ! Entry layout
27222 \begin_layout Standard
27223 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27224 \begin_inset Index idx
27227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27232 This is an italic dummy entry
27237 You can also format the page number using the character
27238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27245 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
27246 -command without a backslash.
27247 We can write for example
27250 \begin_layout Standard
27253 italic page number:|textit
27256 \begin_layout Standard
27257 to get the page number in italic.
27258 \begin_inset Index idx
27261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27264 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27269 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
27270 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
27272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27288 \begin_inset space ~
27294 Have a look at section
27295 \begin_inset space ~
27299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27301 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
27305 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27309 \begin_layout Standard
27310 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27318 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27322 to generate the index, see sec.
27323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27329 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27338 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27343 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27344 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27347 key "latexcompanion"
27359 \begin_layout Standard
27360 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27362 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27363 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27364 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27365 If so, put the following in the preamble
27368 \begin_layout Standard
27380 \begin_layout Standard
27384 \begin_layout Standard
27390 \begin_layout Standard
27391 in the index entry.
27392 \begin_inset Index idx
27395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27398 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27403 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27404 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27405 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27408 \begin_layout Standard
27409 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27410 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27411 a bold font for all index entries.
27412 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27424 documentation for details,
27425 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27427 key "makeindex,xindy"
27434 \begin_layout Subsection
27436 \begin_inset Index idx
27439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27450 name "subsec:Index-Program"
27457 \begin_layout Standard
27458 If the index generation program
27462 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
27463 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27467 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
27468 distribution, is used.
27472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27477 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27478 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27479 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27480 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27481 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27491 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
27493 dialog, see section
27494 \begin_inset space ~
27498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27500 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
27505 The available options are listed and explained in
27506 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27508 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
27513 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27517 \begin_layout Standard
27518 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27519 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
27522 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27523 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27527 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27528 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27531 \begin_layout Subsection
27535 \begin_layout Standard
27536 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27537 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27545 next to the standard index.
27547 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27548 that add this feature.
27555 \begin_inset Index idx
27558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27562 -packages ! splitidx
27567 package to generate multiple indexes.
27568 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
27573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27574 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
27576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27583 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
27584 style, but it also includes
27585 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27586 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27594 \begin_layout Standard
27595 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
27596 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27598 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27599 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27602 and select the option
27604 Use multiple Indexes
27611 already contains the standard index
27612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27620 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27621 also appear as a heading) to the
27625 input field and press the
27630 The new index now also appears in the list.
27631 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
27632 label color to the new index.
27635 \begin_layout Standard
27636 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
27639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27646 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
27647 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
27648 are additional features:
27651 \begin_layout Itemize
27652 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
27653 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
27656 \begin_layout Itemize
27657 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
27658 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
27659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27666 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
27667 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
27668 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
27669 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
27672 \begin_layout Section
27673 Nomenclature/Glossary
27674 \begin_inset Index idx
27677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27686 \begin_inset Index idx
27689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27722 name "sec:Nomenclature"
27729 \begin_layout Standard
27730 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
27731 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
27732 called nomenclature or glossary.
27735 \begin_layout Standard
27736 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27743 \begin_inset Index idx
27746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27750 -packages ! nomencl
27756 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
27758 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27764 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27768 \begin_layout Standard
27769 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
27770 and then use the menu
27772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27778 \begin_inset space ~
27783 or the toolbar button
27786 arg "nomencl-insert"
27791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27802 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
27805 \begin_layout Standard
27806 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
27807 The first is the term or
27811 that you wish to define.
27816 of the term or symbol.
27819 \begin_layout Standard
27820 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27828 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
27829 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
27837 \begin_layout Subsection
27838 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
27839 \begin_inset Index idx
27842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27845 Nomenclature ! Layout
27853 \begin_layout Standard
27854 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
27858 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
27861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27865 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27873 \begin_inset Newline newline
27881 \begin_inset Newline newline
27887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27894 character starts/ends the formula.
27895 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
27896 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
27898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27908 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
27918 \begin_layout Standard
27919 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27920 -syntax is given in section
27921 \begin_inset space ~
27925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27927 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
27934 \begin_layout Standard
27938 \begin_inset space ~
27943 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27945 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
27946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27950 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27957 in this document is:
27958 \begin_inset Newline newline
27963 dummy entry for the character
27968 \begin_inset Newline newline
27980 \begin_inset space ~
27990 font use the command
28019 \begin_layout Standard
28020 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28025 \begin_inset space \space{}
28029 \begin_inset Newline newline
28045 \begin_inset Newline newline
28048 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28049 This command will make the font of all symbols
28056 \begin_inset space ~
28064 \begin_layout Standard
28065 If the characters |
28066 \begin_inset space \space{}
28070 \begin_inset space \space{}
28074 \begin_inset space \space{}
28078 \begin_inset space \space{}
28082 \begin_inset space \space{}
28085 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28086 a quote character in front of them.
28087 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28088 LatexCommand nomenclature
28089 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28090 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28097 \begin_layout Subsection
28098 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28099 \begin_inset Index idx
28102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28105 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28113 \begin_layout Standard
28114 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28115 -code of the symbol
28117 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28119 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28122 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28123 LatexCommand nomenclature
28125 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28132 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28136 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28137 LatexCommand nomenclature
28140 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28145 They will be sorted by
28146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28172 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28175 will be sorted before the
28179 since the character
28180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28187 is considered in sorting.
28190 \begin_layout Standard
28191 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28194 \begin_inset space ~
28199 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28200 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28202 For the example given, you can insert
28206 in this field for the
28207 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28214 will be located before
28215 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28221 \begin_layout Standard
28222 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28227 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28236 \begin_layout Subsection
28237 Nomenclature Options
28238 \begin_inset Index idx
28241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28244 Nomenclature ! Options
28252 \begin_layout Standard
28257 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28258 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28261 \begin_layout Description
28262 refeq Appends the phrase
28263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28278 to every nomenclature entry, where
28284 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28287 \begin_layout Description
28288 refpage Appends the phrase
28289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28304 to every nomenclature entry, where
28310 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28313 \begin_layout Description
28314 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28317 \begin_layout Standard
28318 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28319 class options list in the
28321 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28325 In this document the options
28332 \begin_layout Standard
28333 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28339 \begin_layout Standard
28340 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28341 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28346 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28349 \begin_layout Description
28359 \begin_layout Description
28362 nomrefpage Like the
28369 \begin_layout Description
28372 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28381 \begin_layout Description
28385 \begin_inset space ~
28391 \begin_inset space ~
28396 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28399 \begin_layout Standard
28401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28408 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28409 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28413 \begin_layout Standard
28421 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28424 \begin_inset Newline newline
28431 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28436 \begin_inset Newline newline
28440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28455 by their translation.
28458 \begin_layout Subsection
28459 Printing the Nomenclature
28460 \begin_inset Index idx
28463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28466 Nomenclature ! Printing
28474 \begin_layout Standard
28475 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28478 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28494 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28495 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28496 You can choose between these settings:
28499 \begin_layout Description
28500 Default a space of 1
28501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28507 \begin_layout Description
28509 \begin_inset space ~
28513 \begin_inset space ~
28516 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28519 \begin_layout Description
28520 Custom custom space
28523 \begin_layout Standard
28524 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28533 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28541 For example, in order to change the name to
28545 , add the following line to the preamble:
28548 \begin_layout Standard
28555 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28558 \begin_layout Subsection
28559 Nomenclature Program
28560 \begin_inset Index idx
28563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28566 Nomenclature ! Program
28572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28574 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
28581 \begin_layout Standard
28587 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28588 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28590 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28595 by adding options, see section
28596 \begin_inset space ~
28600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28602 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28607 The available options are listed and explained in
28608 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28610 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28617 \begin_layout Section
28619 \begin_inset Index idx
28622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28631 \begin_inset Index idx
28634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28637 Document ! Branches
28643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28645 name "sec:Branches"
28652 \begin_layout Standard
28653 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28654 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28655 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28656 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28659 \begin_layout Standard
28660 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
28661 allows you to put text into branches.
28662 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28663 To create a branch, either select the menu
28665 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28666 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
28669 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28671 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28678 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28679 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28680 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
28681 and whether the name of the branch should
28682 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28683 (see below for an example).
28684 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28685 to the name of the other) and to add
28686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28698 \begin_inset space ~
28701 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28702 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28705 \begin_layout Standard
28706 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28707 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28712 where you can choose a branch.
28713 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28717 \begin_layout Standard
28718 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
28719 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
28722 \begin_layout Standard
28723 \begin_inset Branch Question
28726 \begin_layout Standard
28729 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
28737 \begin_layout Standard
28738 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28741 \begin_layout Standard
28744 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
28752 \begin_layout Standard
28759 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28760 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28763 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
28764 Consider for example a file
28765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28772 which has the above branches.
28774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28781 is active, the PDF export file would be called
28782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28805 branch were inactive,
28806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28821 branch was active, likewise
28822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28837 branch was active, and
28838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28841 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
28842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28845 if both branches were active.
28846 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
28849 \begin_layout Standard
28850 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28856 \begin_layout Standard
28857 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
28858 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
28859 definitions for each branch.
28860 For example you can define for the question branch
28864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28865 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28866 -syntax, see section
28867 \begin_inset space ~
28871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28873 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28885 \begin_layout Standard
28895 \begin_layout Standard
28905 \begin_layout Standard
28906 and for the answer branch
28909 \begin_layout Standard
28919 \begin_layout Standard
28929 \begin_layout Standard
28930 \begin_inset Branch Question
28933 \begin_layout Standard
28939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28967 \begin_layout Standard
28968 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28971 \begin_layout Standard
28977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29005 \begin_layout Standard
29006 Now it is possible to use the
29010 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29017 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29020 commands to obtain conditional output.
29021 Here is an example formula where only the
29028 \begin_inset Formula
29030 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29038 \begin_layout Standard
29039 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29047 \begin_layout Standard
29048 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29054 \begin_inset space \space{}
29057 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29059 For this advanced usage, see the
29064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29067 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29074 \begin_layout Section
29076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29078 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29083 \begin_inset Index idx
29086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29097 \begin_layout Standard
29100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29101 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29104 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29106 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29112 \begin_inset Index idx
29115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29119 -packages ! hyperref
29124 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29125 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29126 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29127 part of the document.
29131 \begin_layout Standard
29132 The header information in the dialog tab
29136 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29137 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29138 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29139 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29143 \begin_inset space ~
29147 \begin_inset space ~
29152 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
29153 tries to extract the header information from your document title
29154 and author entries.
29158 \begin_inset space ~
29162 \begin_inset space ~
29166 \begin_inset space ~
29171 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29174 \begin_layout Standard
29175 You can specify in the dialog tab
29179 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29184 \begin_inset space ~
29188 \begin_inset space ~
29192 \begin_inset space ~
29197 option allows long links to be split;
29200 \begin_inset space ~
29204 \begin_inset space ~
29208 \begin_inset space ~
29216 \begin_inset space ~
29221 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29224 \begin_inset space ~
29229 colors the different links.
29230 The default colors are:
29233 \begin_layout Labeling
29234 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29239 for hyperlinks and URLs
29242 \begin_layout Labeling
29243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29251 \begin_layout Labeling
29252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29260 \begin_layout Standard
29261 but you can change these in the field
29266 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29269 \begin_layout Standard
29272 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29275 \begin_layout Standard
29280 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29281 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29282 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29285 \begin_layout Standard
29290 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29291 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29292 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29302 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29303 when opening the PDF.
29305 \begin_inset space ~
29308 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29309 \begin_inset space ~
29312 1 will only display the sections.
29315 \begin_layout Standard
29316 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29317 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29323 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29324 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29333 \begin_layout Section
29335 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29339 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29346 \begin_layout Subsection
29349 \begin_inset Index idx
29352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29364 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29371 \begin_layout Standard
29372 As \SpecialChar LyX
29373 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
29374 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
29375 commands and constructs,
29378 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29379 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29380 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29381 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29382 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
29383 cannot support all packages and
29387 \begin_layout Standard
29388 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
29389 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
29390 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
29394 Code box is created by the menu
29396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29398 \begin_inset space ~
29403 or by the toolbar button
29416 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29424 \begin_layout Standard
29425 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
29427 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
29429 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29430 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29437 , you can write the command part
29443 in a \SpecialChar TeX
29444 Code box before the word and the closing brace
29448 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
29449 Code box behind the word.
29450 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
29451 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
29455 \begin_layout Standard
29456 \begin_inset Graphics
29457 filename ../clipart/ERT.png
29465 \begin_layout Standard
29469 \begin_layout Standard
29470 This is a line with a
29474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29497 \begin_layout Standard
29498 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29506 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29507 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29508 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
29509 know that the command is finished.
29517 \begin_layout Subsection
29518 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29520 \begin_inset Argument 1
29523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29526 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29533 \begin_inset Index idx
29536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29548 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29555 \begin_layout Standard
29556 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29557 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29558 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
29559 uses in the background.
29560 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
29561 is based on commands, you can
29562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29570 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29571 any time if you know the right commands.
29572 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29573 is the end of the day.
29574 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29575 all caption labels bold.
29576 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29578 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29582 \begin_layout Standard
29583 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
29585 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29587 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29600 As result you find that the package
29605 \begin_inset Index idx
29608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29612 -packages ! caption
29618 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29620 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29623 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29627 \begin_inset space ~
29635 \begin_layout Standard
29640 usepackage[options]{package name}
29643 \begin_layout Standard
29644 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
29645 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29646 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29647 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29650 \begin_layout Standard
29651 In your case the package name is
29656 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29661 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29662 So you add the command
29665 \begin_layout Standard
29670 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29673 \begin_layout Standard
29674 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29679 For more commands provided by the
29683 package, have a look at its documentation,
29684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29698 \begin_layout Standard
29699 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29701 For example if you use a
29705 class, you don't need the package
29709 , you can instead write
29712 \begin_layout Standard
29717 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29722 \begin_layout Standard
29723 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29724 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29725 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29732 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29735 \begin_layout Standard
29736 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29737 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29739 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29740 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
29741 Code box as described in the previous
29745 \begin_layout Standard
29746 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29747 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29750 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29752 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29766 \begin_layout Standard
29770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29780 \begin_inset Note Note
29783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29786 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29794 \begin_layout Left Header
29795 \begin_inset Argument 1
29798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29818 \begin_inset Note Note
29821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29824 defines the header line as described below
29832 \begin_layout Center Header
29833 \begin_inset Argument 1
29836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29845 \begin_layout Right Header
29846 \begin_inset Argument 1
29849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29872 \begin_layout Left Footer
29873 \begin_inset Argument 1
29876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29899 \begin_layout Center Footer
29900 \begin_inset Argument 1
29903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29916 \begin_inset Newline newline
29920 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
29926 \begin_layout Right Footer
29927 \begin_inset Argument 1
29930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29952 \begin_layout Section
29953 Customized Page Headers and Footers
29954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29956 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
29961 \begin_inset Index idx
29964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29967 Document ! Header/Footer line
29973 \begin_inset Index idx
29976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29987 \begin_layout Standard
29988 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
29992 \begin_inset space ~
30003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30009 \begin_inset space ~
30015 As a second step add in the menu
30017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30025 Custom Header/Footerlines
30026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30030 This module offers the following 6
30031 \begin_inset space ~
30037 \begin_layout Description
30039 \begin_inset space ~
30043 \begin_inset space ~
30047 \begin_inset space ~
30051 \begin_inset space ~
30055 \begin_inset space ~
30061 \begin_layout Description
30063 \begin_inset space ~
30067 \begin_inset space ~
30071 \begin_inset space ~
30075 \begin_inset space ~
30079 \begin_inset space ~
30085 \begin_layout Standard
30086 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30089 \begin_layout Standard
30090 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30091 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30093 \begin_inset space ~
30097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30099 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30103 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30106 \begin_layout Standard
30107 \begin_inset Float figure
30113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30116 \begin_inset Tabular
30117 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30118 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30119 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30121 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30123 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30141 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30152 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30170 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30181 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30185 The normal text on the page goes here.
30186 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30188 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30189 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30194 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30203 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30214 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30232 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30243 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30279 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30286 name "fig:Page-layout"
30290 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30303 \begin_layout Standard
30304 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30312 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30316 \begin_inset space ~
30321 is set to “Default”.
30322 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30331 \begin_layout Subsection
30335 \begin_layout Standard
30336 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30337 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30338 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30339 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30341 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30342 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30345 \begin_layout Standard
30346 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
30347 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30353 \begin_inset space ~
30361 \begin_layout Description
30364 thepage prints the current page number
30367 \begin_layout Description
30370 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30373 \begin_layout Description
30376 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30379 \begin_layout Description
30382 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30383 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30390 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30393 because it usually goes in a left header.
30396 \begin_layout Description
30399 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30400 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30402 It is normally used in the right header.
30405 \begin_layout Subsection
30406 Default header/footer
30409 \begin_layout Standard
30410 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30411 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30412 footer has the page number.
30413 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30414 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30415 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30418 \begin_inset space ~
30426 \begin_layout Subsection
30430 \begin_layout Standard
30431 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30432 Some pages are different.
30433 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30434 a new part or chapter in your book.
30435 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30436 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30437 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30440 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30441 Header and footer decoration line
30444 \begin_layout Standard
30445 By default, you get a 0.4
30446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30449 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30450 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30462 in the following way:
30465 \begin_layout Standard
30472 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30475 \begin_layout Standard
30476 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30485 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30492 \begin_layout Standard
30493 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30495 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30496 \begin_inset space ~
30500 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30510 Several header/footer lines
30513 \begin_layout Standard
30514 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30515 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30516 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30518 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30533 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30534 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30547 \begin_inset space ~
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30562 headheight}{height}
30565 \begin_layout Standard
30566 where height is a size in standard units.
30567 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30568 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30569 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30570 logfile with the menu
30572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30578 \begin_inset space ~
30583 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30588 \begin_inset Index idx
30591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30595 -packages ! fancyhdr
30601 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30602 for your header/footer.
30605 \begin_layout Subsection
30609 \begin_layout Standard
30610 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30611 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30612 This example consists of the following definition:
30615 \begin_layout Description
30617 \begin_inset space ~
30626 , empty optional argument
30629 \begin_layout Description
30631 \begin_inset space ~
30634 Header empty, empty optional argument
30637 \begin_layout Description
30639 \begin_inset space ~
30648 in the optional argument
30651 \begin_layout Description
30653 \begin_inset space ~
30662 in the optional argument
30665 \begin_layout Description
30667 \begin_inset space ~
30680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30684 \begin_inset Newline newline
30688 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30695 in the optional argument
30698 \begin_layout Description
30700 \begin_inset space ~
30709 , empty optional argument
30712 \begin_layout Description
30715 headrulewidth set to 2
30716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30722 \begin_layout Standard
30723 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30724 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
30730 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30739 \begin_layout Standard
30740 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30746 \begin_layout Standard
30750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30754 pagestyle{headings}
30760 \begin_inset Note Note
30763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30766 switches back to page style with the default headings
30774 \begin_layout Section
30775 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30778 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30783 \begin_inset Index idx
30786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30795 \begin_inset Index idx
30798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30809 \begin_layout Standard
30811 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
30812 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
30813 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
30816 \begin_layout Subsection
30820 \begin_layout Standard
30821 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30827 \begin_inset Index idx
30830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30834 -packages ! preview-latex
30839 (on some systems named simply
30844 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30846 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30852 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30854 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30862 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
30863 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30864 -package are automatically
30865 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
30869 \begin_layout Subsection
30873 \begin_layout Standard
30874 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
30875 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30877 activate the option
30880 \begin_inset space ~
30887 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30893 \begin_inset space ~
30897 \begin_inset space ~
30900 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
30907 \begin_inset space ~
30920 \begin_inset space ~
30925 is the multiplication factor for the size.
30928 \begin_layout Standard
30929 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30934 \begin_inset space ~
30942 \begin_inset space ~
30950 \begin_layout Standard
30951 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
30952 and when you finish
30956 \begin_layout Standard
30957 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30965 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
30966 generated by activating the option
30969 \begin_inset space ~
30975 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
30983 \begin_layout Subsection
30984 Selected document parts
30987 \begin_layout Standard
30988 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
30989 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
30990 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
30991 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
30993 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
30995 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30999 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31000 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31001 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31004 \begin_layout Standard
31005 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31012 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31024 is explained in section
31026 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31031 \begin_inset space ~
31041 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31042 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31043 the final rotated boxes,
31044 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31045 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31047 Here is the result:
31050 \begin_layout Standard
31051 \begin_inset Preview
31053 \begin_layout Standard
31060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31064 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31070 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31080 height_special "totalheight"
31085 backgroundcolor "none"
31088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31115 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31121 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31143 \begin_layout Standard
31144 Previewing works also for colors.
31145 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31164 is explained in section
31171 \begin_inset space ~
31184 \begin_layout Standard
31185 \begin_inset Preview
31187 \begin_layout Standard
31193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31212 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31217 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31236 \begin_layout Standard
31237 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31243 \begin_layout Standard
31244 If \SpecialChar LyX
31245 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31246 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
31247 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
31248 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31249 packages in your document preamble that are required by
31250 the \SpecialChar TeX
31252 If \SpecialChar LyX
31253 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
31254 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
31256 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
31257 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
31258 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
31261 \begin_layout Subsection
31266 \begin_layout Standard
31267 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31268 source of the whole document or parts of it.
31271 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
31273 \begin_inset space ~
31278 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31280 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31282 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
31283 's main window, then only this selection
31284 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31285 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31286 the source view window.
31291 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
31292 ; but note that if you have
31293 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
31295 not just the one which is open at the time.
31298 \begin_layout Section
31299 Advanced Find and Replace
31300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31302 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31307 \begin_inset Index idx
31310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31319 \begin_inset Index idx
31322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31333 \begin_layout Subsection
31337 \begin_layout Standard
31338 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
31339 allows for searching of complex,
31340 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
31342 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31343 The key-features are:
31346 \begin_layout Itemize
31347 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31348 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31349 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31353 \begin_layout Itemize
31354 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31355 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31356 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31357 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31360 \begin_layout Itemize
31361 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31362 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31363 outside of mathematics environments
31366 \begin_layout Itemize
31367 Search may be widened to a specific
31372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31376 \begin_inset space ~
31379 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31380 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31387 \begin_layout Itemize
31388 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31389 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31394 \begin_inset space ~
31397 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31400 \begin_layout Subsection
31404 \begin_layout Standard
31405 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31407 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31420 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31423 ) or the toolbar button
31426 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31432 Advanced Find and Replace
31437 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31441 \begin_layout Standard
31447 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31451 \begin_inset space ~
31456 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31459 arg "paragraph-break"
31463 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31464 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31468 arg "paragraph-break"
31471 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31475 searches backwards.
31478 \begin_layout Standard
31482 \begin_inset space ~
31487 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31496 \begin_inset space ~
31501 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31505 Searching for mathematics
31508 \begin_layout Standard
31509 Mathematical formulas, such as
31510 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31513 or something more complex like
31514 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31517 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31522 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31523 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31524 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31525 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31535 \begin_layout Standard
31536 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31537 This is done by switching to the
31541 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31546 This way, entering in the
31553 \begin_layout Itemize
31554 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31555 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31558 \begin_layout Itemize
31559 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31560 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31563 \begin_layout Itemize
31564 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31565 of it only within section headings.
31566 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31567 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31571 \begin_layout Itemize
31572 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31573 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31580 \begin_layout Standard
31581 The entries made in the
31585 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31588 \begin_inset space ~
31594 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31598 button or alternatively press
31601 arg "paragraph-break"
31608 while the cursor is in the
31611 \begin_inset space ~
31619 \begin_layout Standard
31620 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
31622 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31626 \begin_layout Itemize
31627 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31628 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31636 with its typewriter version
31637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31651 \begin_layout Itemize
31652 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31658 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31670 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31677 (you may want to enable the
31680 \begin_inset space ~
31688 \begin_inset space ~
31693 options and disable the
31701 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31709 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31710 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31714 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
31717 , or occurrences of
31718 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31722 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31728 \begin_layout Subsection
31732 \begin_layout Standard
31733 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31738 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31740 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31742 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31751 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31757 This is done with the context menu
31759 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31760 Insert Regular Expression
31762 while the cursor is in the
31767 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31768 expression matching rules
31772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31773 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
31776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31780 \begin_inset space ~
31783 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
31784 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
31790 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31791 same text in the document.
31792 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
31793 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31796 \begin_layout Enumerate
31797 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31802 editor the fraction
31803 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31807 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31810 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31811 fractions with the given denominator.
31814 \begin_layout Enumerate
31815 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31827 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31832 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
31833 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
31834 Also, by inserting a
31835 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31838 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31839 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31842 \begin_layout Standard
31843 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
31844 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31845 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31848 , and referring back to them through
31849 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31853 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31857 For example, try searching with the regexp
31858 \begin_inset Newline newline
31861 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
31864 \begin_inset Newline newline
31867 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31870 \begin_layout Standard
31871 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
31874 \begin_layout Standard
31875 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31883 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
31884 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
31885 sub-expressions is absolute.
31887 \begin_inset space ~
31891 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31894 always refers to the first occurrence of
31895 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31898 in all entered regexps.
31906 \begin_layout Section
31908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31910 name "sec:Spellchecking"
31915 \begin_inset Index idx
31918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31929 \begin_layout Standard
31931 has a built-in spell checker.
31934 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31941 key or the toolbar button
31944 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
31947 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
31948 beginning of the currently selected text.
31949 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
31950 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
31951 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
31952 scrolled so that it is visible.
31953 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
31954 n, if any could be found.
31955 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
31959 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
31960 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
31963 \begin_layout Standard
31964 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
31967 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31971 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
31972 a different one at the top of the dialog.
31974 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
31975 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
31978 \begin_inset space ~
31986 arg "dialog-show character"
31989 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
31991 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
31994 \begin_layout Standard
31995 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31996 can be downloaded from here:
31997 \begin_inset Newline newline
32001 \begin_inset Flex URL
32004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32006 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32012 \begin_inset Newline newline
32016 \begin_inset space ~
32019 files for each language.
32020 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32021 \begin_inset space ~
32024 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32025 's installation subfolder
32033 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32035 \begin_inset Newline newline
32038 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32039 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32040 but in most cases these are
32056 is the language code.
32059 \begin_layout Subsection
32063 \begin_layout Standard
32066 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32067 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32069 \begin_inset space ~
32072 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32075 you can set the following things:
32078 \begin_layout Description
32080 \begin_inset space ~
32083 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32084 should use for spell checking.
32085 Depending on your platform,
32099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32100 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32101 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32116 \begin_inset space ~
32119 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32122 \begin_layout Description
32124 \begin_inset space ~
32127 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32128 will always use the given language
32129 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32132 \begin_layout Description
32134 \begin_inset space ~
32137 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32143 \begin_inset space \space{}
32147 This should normally not be needed.
32150 \begin_layout Description
32152 \begin_inset space ~
32156 \begin_inset space ~
32159 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32171 \begin_layout Description
32173 \begin_inset space ~
32176 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32177 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32178 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32179 appear in a context menu.
32180 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32184 \begin_layout Description
32186 \begin_inset space ~
32190 \begin_inset space ~
32194 \begin_inset space ~
32197 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32201 \begin_layout Section
32203 \begin_inset Index idx
32206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32217 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32224 \begin_layout Standard
32226 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32227 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32237 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32239 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32248 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
32250 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
32251 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32252 which are available for many languages.
32255 \begin_layout Standard
32256 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32257 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
32261 \begin_layout Subsection
32262 Setting up the thesaurus
32265 \begin_layout Standard
32274 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32278 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32283 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32289 \begin_inset space ~
32297 For instance, the US English files are named:
32300 \begin_layout Itemize
32304 \begin_layout Itemize
32308 \begin_layout Standard
32317 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32318 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
32321 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32322 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32323 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32325 \begin_inset space ~
32330 ) to the path where they are installed.
32334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32335 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32336 ies, typical locations are
32342 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32346 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32350 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32353 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32359 LibreOffice-<Version>
32366 On the Mac, the default location is
32368 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
32369 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
32370 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
32371 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
32372 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
32373 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
32381 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32382 during the \SpecialChar LyX
32383 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
32387 \begin_layout Standard
32388 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
32389 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32393 \begin_layout Itemize
32394 \begin_inset Flex URL
32397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32399 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32407 \begin_layout Standard
32408 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32409 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32411 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32412 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32413 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32415 \begin_inset space ~
32420 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32422 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32423 and point \SpecialChar LyX
32427 \begin_layout Standard
32428 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32430 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
32433 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32439 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32442 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
32443 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32451 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32452 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32453 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32455 \begin_inset space ~
32460 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32463 \begin_layout Subsection
32464 Using the thesaurus
32467 \begin_layout Standard
32468 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32470 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32473 or the toolbar button
32476 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32479 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32481 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32483 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32484 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32485 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32494 ), related terms (such as
32497 \begin_inset space ~
32506 ), compounds (such as
32509 \begin_inset space ~
32518 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32527 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32530 \begin_layout Standard
32531 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32532 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32536 \begin_layout Standard
32537 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32538 the dictionary, such as the above
32542 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32547 \begin_inset space \space{}
32550 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32551 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32552 For example, looking up the word form
32556 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32561 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32566 \begin_inset space \space{}
32577 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32578 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32579 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32582 \begin_layout Section
32584 \begin_inset Index idx
32587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32596 \begin_inset Index idx
32599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32602 Document ! Change Tracking
32608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32610 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32617 \begin_layout Standard
32618 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32619 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32620 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32621 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32625 \begin_inset space ~
32628 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32630 \begin_inset space ~
32638 \begin_layout Standard
32639 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32653 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32654 You can change the color in
32656 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32657 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32659 \begin_inset space ~
32663 \begin_inset space ~
32668 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32674 \begin_inset Index idx
32677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32680 Color ! Change tracking
32685 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
32686 's status bar when the
32687 cursor is in changed text.
32688 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32691 arg "changes-merge"
32697 \begin_layout Standard
32698 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
32700 \begin_inset Index idx
32703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32714 \begin_layout Standard
32715 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32721 \begin_layout Standard
32722 \begin_inset Graphics
32723 filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32731 \begin_layout Standard
32732 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32738 \begin_layout Standard
32739 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
32742 \begin_layout Standard
32743 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32749 \begin_layout Standard
32750 \begin_inset Tabular
32751 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32752 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32753 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32754 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32764 arg "changes-track"
32772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32780 \begin_inset space ~
32783 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32785 \begin_inset space ~
32794 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32803 arg "changes-output"
32811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32819 \begin_inset space ~
32822 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32824 \begin_inset space ~
32828 \begin_inset space ~
32832 \begin_inset space ~
32841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32862 Jumps to the next change
32868 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32877 arg "change-accept"
32885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32891 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32893 \begin_inset space ~
32896 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32898 \begin_inset space ~
32907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32916 arg "change-reject"
32924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32930 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32932 \begin_inset space ~
32935 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32937 \begin_inset space ~
32946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32955 arg "changes-merge"
32963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32969 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32971 \begin_inset space ~
32974 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32976 \begin_inset space ~
32985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32994 arg "all-changes-accept"
33002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33010 \begin_inset space ~
33013 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33015 \begin_inset space ~
33019 \begin_inset space ~
33028 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33037 arg "all-changes-reject"
33045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33053 \begin_inset space ~
33056 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33058 \begin_inset space ~
33062 \begin_inset space ~
33071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33094 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33095 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33097 \begin_inset space ~
33106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33129 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33131 \begin_inset space ~
33147 \begin_layout Standard
33148 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33154 \begin_layout Standard
33155 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33175 \begin_layout Standard
33176 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33177 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33178 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33179 the next change after the current cursor position.
33180 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33181 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33182 step to the next change.
33183 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33186 \begin_layout Standard
33187 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33188 to describe a change.
33191 \begin_layout Standard
33192 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33198 \begin_inset Index idx
33201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33205 -packages ! dvipost
33211 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33213 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33219 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33223 \begin_layout Section
33224 Comparison of Documents
33225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33227 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33232 \begin_inset Index idx
33235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33238 Comparison of documents
33246 \begin_layout Standard
33247 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
33250 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33254 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
33255 file with change tracking enabled showing the
33257 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
33259 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33263 \begin_inset space ~
33267 \begin_inset space ~
33271 \begin_inset space ~
33280 \begin_inset space ~
33284 \begin_inset space ~
33288 \begin_inset space ~
33292 \begin_inset space ~
33296 \begin_inset space ~
33300 \begin_inset space ~
33305 enables the change tracking option
33308 \begin_inset space ~
33312 \begin_inset space ~
33316 \begin_inset space ~
33321 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33324 \begin_layout Section
33325 International Support
33326 \begin_inset Index idx
33329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33332 International support
33340 \begin_layout Standard
33341 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
33342 with any language you want.
33343 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33344 up \SpecialChar LyX
33346 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33348 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33355 \begin_layout Standard
33356 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
33357 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33358 \begin_inset space ~
33362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33364 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
33371 \begin_layout Subsection
33373 \begin_inset Index idx
33376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33385 \begin_inset Index idx
33388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33391 Document ! Settings
33397 \begin_inset Index idx
33400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33403 Document ! Language
33411 \begin_layout Standard
33414 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33415 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33418 dialog lets you set the language, the quote style and character encoding.
33421 \begin_layout Standard
33426 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
33431 \begin_inset space ~
33436 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33437 For details about the different encoding options see section
33438 \begin_inset space ~
33442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33444 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33451 \begin_layout Subsection
33452 Keyboard mapping configuration
33453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33455 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
33462 \begin_layout Standard
33463 If you have for example a U.
33464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33467 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33468 can use an alternate keymap.
33469 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
33474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33475 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33476 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
33479 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33480 \begin_inset space ~
33484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33486 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
33491 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33492 which one you want to use.
33495 \begin_layout Standard
33496 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33497 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33498 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33502 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33503 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33504 one to support the characters you want.
33505 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33512 \begin_layout Chapter
33515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33517 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33524 \begin_layout Standard
33525 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33526 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33527 topic inside the user's guide.
33530 \begin_layout Section
33532 \begin_inset Index idx
33535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33546 \begin_layout Standard
33551 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33554 \begin_layout Subsection
33558 \begin_layout Standard
33559 Creates a new document.
33562 \begin_layout Subsection
33566 \begin_layout Standard
33567 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33568 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33569 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33572 \begin_layout Subsection
33576 \begin_layout Standard
33580 \begin_layout Subsection
33584 \begin_layout Standard
33585 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33586 Click there on a file to open it.
33589 \begin_layout Subsection
33593 \begin_layout Standard
33594 Closes the current document.
33597 \begin_layout Subsection
33601 \begin_layout Standard
33602 Closes all opened documents.
33605 \begin_layout Subsection
33609 \begin_layout Standard
33610 Saves the actual document.
33613 \begin_layout Subsection
33617 \begin_layout Standard
33618 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33621 \begin_layout Subsection
33625 \begin_layout Standard
33626 Saves all opened documents.
33629 \begin_layout Subsection
33633 \begin_layout Standard
33634 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33637 \begin_layout Subsection
33641 \begin_layout Standard
33642 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33643 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33644 It is described in the section
33646 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
33651 Additional Features
33656 \begin_layout Subsection
33660 \begin_layout Standard
33661 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
33662 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
33664 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
33665 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
33669 \begin_layout Standard
33670 When using the menu entry
33673 \begin_inset space ~
33678 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33682 \begin_inset space ~
33686 \begin_inset space ~
33690 \begin_inset space ~
33695 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33696 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33699 \begin_layout Subsection
33701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33703 name "subsec:Export"
33710 \begin_layout Standard
33711 You can export your document to various file formats.
33712 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
33714 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33715 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
33716 during its configuration.
33719 \begin_layout Standard
33720 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33722 \begin_inset space ~
33726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33728 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
33735 \begin_layout Description
33737 \begin_inset space ~
33740 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
33742 \begin_inset space ~
33745 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33746 \begin_inset Newline newline
33749 Since \SpecialChar LyX
33750 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
33754 \begin_layout Description
33755 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33761 \begin_layout Description
33763 \begin_inset space ~
33766 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33772 \begin_layout Description
33773 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
33774 's native DVI-format.
33775 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33776 files paths or file names in your document.
33778 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33785 \begin_layout Description
33786 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33787 in files paths or file names
33790 \begin_layout Description
33792 \begin_inset space ~
33795 (LuaTeX) DVI-format using the program
33797 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
33800 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
33804 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33812 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33820 \begin_layout Description
33822 \begin_inset space ~
33825 (cropped) the same as
33829 but with cropped page margins.
33832 \begin_layout Description
33834 \begin_inset space ~
33837 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33841 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33846 \begin_layout Description
33850 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33858 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
33866 \begin_layout Description
33868 \begin_inset space ~
33872 \begin_inset space ~
33875 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33879 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33887 \begin_layout Description
33889 \begin_inset space ~
33892 (LuaTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33893 source that is compilable with the program
33896 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
33900 \begin_layout Description
33902 \begin_inset space ~
33905 (pdflatex) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33906 source, additionally all images used in the
33907 document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
33911 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
33914 \begin_layout Description
33916 \begin_inset space ~
33919 (plain) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33920 source code, additionally all images used in
33921 the document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
33929 \begin_layout Description
33931 \begin_inset space ~
33934 (XeTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33935 source that is compilable with the program
33941 \begin_layout Description
33943 \begin_inset space ~
33947 \begin_inset space ~
33950 (LaTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33951 source and also code in the syntax of the music
33957 \begin_layout Description
33959 \begin_inset space ~
33962 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
33963 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
33965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33969 \begin_inset space \space{}
33974 \begin_inset space ~
33978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33993 represent the version number)
33996 \begin_layout Description
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34002 \begin_inset space ~
34005 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34006 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34007 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34011 \begin_layout Description
34012 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34013 's internal XHTML engine
34016 \begin_layout Description
34017 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34022 \begin_layout Description
34023 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34025 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34028 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34032 \begin_layout Description
34034 \begin_inset space ~
34037 (cropped) the same as
34040 \begin_inset space ~
34045 but with cropped page margins
34048 \begin_layout Description
34050 \begin_inset space ~
34053 (dvipdfm) PDF-format using the program
34057 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34060 \begin_layout Description
34062 \begin_inset space ~
34066 \begin_inset space ~
34069 resolution) the same as
34072 \begin_inset space ~
34077 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34082 \begin_inset space \space{}
34085 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34089 \begin_layout Description
34091 \begin_inset space ~
34094 (LuaTeX) PDF-format using the program
34096 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34099 , produces PDF-files directly
34102 \begin_layout Description
34104 \begin_inset space ~
34107 (pdflatex) PDF-format using the program
34111 , produces PDF-files directly
34114 \begin_layout Description
34116 \begin_inset space ~
34119 (ps2pdf) PDF-format using the program
34123 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34126 \begin_layout Description
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34131 (XeTeX) PDF-format using the program
34136 , produces PDF-files directly
34139 \begin_layout Description
34141 \begin_inset space ~
34147 \begin_layout Description
34149 \begin_inset space ~
34153 \begin_inset space ~
34156 (ps2ascii) text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript
34157 format and then exported as text using the program
34162 \begin_layout Description
34163 Postscript PostScript format using the program
34168 \begin_layout Description
34169 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34170 source and also code in the statistical programming
34184 it is possible to use
34188 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34192 \begin_layout Standard
34193 If one of the menu entries
34200 \begin_inset space ~
34209 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34211 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
34213 \begin_inset space ~
34217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34219 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34224 \begin_inset Index idx
34227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34230 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
34239 \begin_layout Subsection
34243 \begin_layout Standard
34244 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34245 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
34248 \begin_inset space ~
34252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34254 reference "sec:Paths"
34259 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34268 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34269 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
34270 's preferences as described in section
34271 \begin_inset space ~
34275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34277 reference "subsec:Converters"
34284 \begin_layout Subsection
34285 New and Close Window
34288 \begin_layout Standard
34289 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
34293 \begin_layout Subsection
34297 \begin_layout Standard
34298 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34301 \begin_layout Section
34303 \begin_inset Index idx
34306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34317 \begin_layout Subsection
34321 \begin_layout Standard
34322 Described in section
34323 \begin_inset space ~
34327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34329 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34336 \begin_layout Subsection
34337 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34340 \begin_layout Standard
34341 Described in section
34342 \begin_inset space ~
34346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34348 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34355 \begin_layout Subsection
34359 \begin_layout Standard
34360 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34361 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34364 \begin_layout Subsection
34368 \begin_layout Standard
34369 Selects the whole document.
34372 \begin_layout Subsection
34373 Find & Replace (Quick)
34376 \begin_layout Standard
34377 Described in section
34378 \begin_inset space ~
34382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34384 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34391 \begin_layout Subsection
34392 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34395 \begin_layout Standard
34396 Described in section
34397 \begin_inset space ~
34401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34403 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34410 \begin_layout Subsection
34411 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34414 \begin_layout Standard
34415 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34419 \begin_layout Subsection
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34424 Described in section
34425 \begin_inset space ~
34429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34431 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34438 \begin_layout Subsection
34440 \begin_inset Index idx
34443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34446 Paragraph ! Settings
34454 \begin_layout Standard
34455 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34456 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34460 \begin_layout Standard
34461 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34462 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34469 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34471 \begin_inset space ~
34479 \begin_layout Subsection
34483 \begin_layout Standard
34484 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34485 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34486 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34490 \begin_layout Standard
34491 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34493 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34494 The properties of tables are described in section
34495 \begin_inset space ~
34499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34501 reference "sec:Tables"
34505 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34506 \begin_inset space ~
34510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34512 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34519 \begin_layout Subsection
34520 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34523 \begin_layout Standard
34524 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
34526 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34527 \begin_inset space ~
34531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34533 reference "sec:Nesting"
34538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34540 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34547 \begin_layout Subsection
34548 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
34551 \begin_layout Standard
34552 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
34553 nts of the same type.
34555 \begin_inset space ~
34559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34561 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
34565 for an explanation.
34568 \begin_layout Section
34570 \begin_inset Index idx
34573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34584 \begin_layout Standard
34585 At the bottom of the
34589 menu the opened documents are listed.
34592 \begin_layout Subsection
34593 Open/Close all Insets
34596 \begin_layout Standard
34597 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34600 \begin_layout Subsection
34601 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34604 \begin_layout Standard
34605 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34608 \begin_layout Standard
34609 Math macros are described in the
34616 \begin_layout Subsection
34620 \begin_layout Standard
34621 Shows the outline window as described in sections
34622 \begin_inset space ~
34626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34628 reference "sec:Navigating"
34633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34635 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
34642 \begin_layout Subsection
34646 \begin_layout Standard
34647 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34649 \begin_inset space ~
34653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34655 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34662 \begin_layout Subsection
34666 \begin_layout Standard
34667 Opens a window showing console messages.
34668 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
34670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34673 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34674 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
34675 is processing the document.
34678 \begin_layout Subsection
34680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34682 name "subsec:Toolbars"
34687 \begin_inset Index idx
34690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34701 \begin_layout Standard
34702 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34703 All toolbars and the
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34711 can be turned on and off.
34716 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34728 \begin_inset space ~
34740 \begin_inset space ~
34745 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
34749 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
34756 \begin_layout Standard
34761 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
34765 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
34766 or when a certain feature is enabled.
34767 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
34768 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
34769 is inside a formula or table respectively.
34772 \begin_layout Standard
34774 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
34775 \begin_inset space ~
34779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34781 reference "sec:Toolbars"
34788 \begin_layout Subsection
34792 \begin_layout Standard
34796 \begin_inset space ~
34800 \begin_inset space ~
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34808 \begin_inset space ~
34812 \begin_inset space ~
34816 \begin_inset space ~
34821 will split \SpecialChar LyX
34822 's main window vertically while
34825 \begin_inset space ~
34829 \begin_inset space ~
34833 \begin_inset space ~
34837 \begin_inset space ~
34841 \begin_inset space ~
34845 \begin_inset space ~
34850 will split it horizontally.
34851 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
34852 to view the same document, but at different positions.
34853 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
34854 three or more documents at the same time.
34855 To close a split view, use the menu
34858 \begin_inset space ~
34862 \begin_inset space ~
34870 \begin_layout Subsection
34874 \begin_layout Standard
34875 Closes a split view.
34878 \begin_layout Subsection
34882 \begin_layout Standard
34883 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
34884 so that you will see nothing but your text.
34885 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
34886 's main window fullscreen.
34887 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
34888 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
34891 \begin_layout Section
34893 \begin_inset Index idx
34896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34907 \begin_layout Subsection
34911 \begin_layout Standard
34912 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
34913 \begin_inset space ~
34917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34919 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34930 \begin_layout Subsection
34932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34934 name "subsec:Special-Character"
34941 \begin_layout Standard
34942 Here you can insert the following characters:
34945 \begin_layout Description
34950 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
34953 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
34954 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34955 -packages you have installed.
34956 You can get a complete display by checking
34959 \begin_inset space ~
34965 \begin_inset Newline newline
34969 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34977 Not all characters will be visible in the
34981 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
34983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34989 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
34993 ) can display every character.
35001 \begin_layout Description
35002 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35006 \begin_layout Description
35008 \begin_inset space ~
35012 \begin_inset space ~
35015 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35022 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35029 \begin_layout Description
35031 \begin_inset space ~
35034 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35038 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35044 \begin_layout Description
35046 \begin_inset space ~
35049 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35053 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35059 \begin_layout Description
35061 \begin_inset space ~
35064 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35068 \begin_layout Description
35070 \begin_inset space ~
35073 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35077 \begin_layout Description
35079 \begin_inset space ~
35082 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35088 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35094 \begin_layout Description
35096 \begin_inset space ~
35099 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35103 \begin_layout Description
35105 \begin_inset space ~
35109 \begin_inset Index idx
35112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35121 \begin_inset Index idx
35124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35127 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35132 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35133 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35135 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35141 \begin_inset Index idx
35144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35154 \begin_inset Newline newline
35157 More information about this feature can be found in the
35163 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
35169 \begin_layout Subsection
35173 \begin_layout Standard
35174 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35177 \begin_layout Description
35178 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35179 \begin_inset script superscript
35181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35192 \begin_layout Description
35193 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35194 \begin_inset script subscript
35196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35207 \begin_layout Description
35209 \begin_inset space ~
35212 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35213 \begin_inset space ~
35217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35219 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
35226 \begin_layout Description
35228 \begin_inset space ~
35231 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35232 \begin_inset space ~
35236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35238 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
35245 \begin_layout Description
35247 \begin_inset space ~
35250 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35251 \begin_inset space ~
35255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35257 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
35264 \begin_layout Description
35266 \begin_inset space ~
35269 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35275 \begin_inset space \space{}
35278 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35279 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
35285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35288 To insert a fraction use the command
35293 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35297 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35306 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35313 \begin_layout Description
35315 \begin_inset space ~
35318 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35319 \begin_inset space ~
35323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35325 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
35332 \begin_layout Description
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35337 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35338 \begin_inset space ~
35342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35344 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
35351 \begin_layout Description
35353 \begin_inset space ~
35356 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35357 \begin_inset space ~
35361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35363 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
35370 \begin_layout Description
35371 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35372 \begin_inset space ~
35376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35378 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
35385 \begin_layout Description
35387 \begin_inset space ~
35390 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35391 \begin_inset space ~
35395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35397 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
35404 \begin_layout Description
35406 \begin_inset space ~
35409 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35410 \begin_inset space ~
35414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35416 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
35423 \begin_layout Description
35425 \begin_inset space ~
35429 \begin_inset space ~
35432 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35433 \begin_inset space ~
35437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35439 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35446 \begin_layout Description
35448 \begin_inset space ~
35451 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35452 as described in section
35453 \begin_inset space ~
35457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35459 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35466 \begin_layout Description
35468 \begin_inset space ~
35471 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35472 \begin_inset space ~
35476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35478 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35485 \begin_layout Description
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35490 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35491 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35493 \begin_inset space ~
35497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35499 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35506 \begin_layout Description
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35511 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35512 \begin_inset space ~
35516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35518 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35525 \begin_layout Description
35527 \begin_inset space ~
35531 \begin_inset space ~
35534 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35535 \begin_inset space ~
35539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35541 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35548 \begin_layout Subsection
35552 \begin_layout Standard
35553 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35557 \begin_inset space ~
35578 are described in section
35579 \begin_inset space ~
35583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35585 reference "sec:toc"
35594 is described in section
35595 \begin_inset space ~
35599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35601 reference "sec:Index"
35609 is described in section
35610 \begin_inset space ~
35614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35616 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35622 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35625 is described in section
35626 \begin_inset space ~
35630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35632 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35639 \begin_layout Subsection
35643 \begin_layout Standard
35644 To insert floats, as described in section
35645 \begin_inset space ~
35649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35651 reference "sec:Floats"
35655 and in detail the chapter
35662 \begin_inset space ~
35670 \begin_layout Subsection
35674 \begin_layout Standard
35675 To insert notes, described in section
35676 \begin_inset space ~
35680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35682 reference "sec:Notes"
35689 \begin_layout Subsection
35693 \begin_layout Standard
35694 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
35696 Branches are described in section
35697 \begin_inset space ~
35701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35703 reference "sec:Branches"
35710 \begin_layout Subsection
35714 \begin_layout Standard
35715 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35716 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35718 An example is the document class
35719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35726 with three custom insets.
35729 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35733 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
35739 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35742 \begin_layout Subsection
35744 \begin_inset Index idx
35747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35758 \begin_layout Standard
35759 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35761 For more information see chapter
35763 External Document Parts
35766 \begin_inset space ~
35772 \begin_layout Subsection
35774 \begin_inset Index idx
35777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35788 \begin_layout Standard
35789 Inserts a box in a certain style.
35790 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
35797 \begin_inset space ~
35805 \begin_layout Subsection
35809 \begin_layout Standard
35814 dialog as described in section
35815 \begin_inset space ~
35819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35821 reference "sec:Bibliography"
35828 \begin_layout Subsection
35832 \begin_layout Standard
35837 as described in section
35838 \begin_inset space ~
35842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35844 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35851 \begin_layout Subsection
35855 \begin_layout Standard
35860 as described in section
35861 \begin_inset space ~
35865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35867 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35874 \begin_layout Subsection
35876 \begin_inset Index idx
35879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35888 \begin_inset Index idx
35891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35894 Longtables ! Caption
35902 \begin_layout Standard
35903 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
35904 Floats are described in section
35905 \begin_inset space ~
35909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35911 reference "sec:Floats"
35915 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
35922 \begin_inset space ~
35930 \begin_layout Subsection
35934 \begin_layout Standard
35935 Inserts an index entry as described in section
35936 \begin_inset space ~
35940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35942 reference "sec:Index"
35949 \begin_layout Subsection
35953 \begin_layout Standard
35954 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
35955 \begin_inset space ~
35959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35961 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35968 \begin_layout Subsection
35972 \begin_layout Standard
35973 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
35974 Tables are described in section
35975 \begin_inset space ~
35979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35981 reference "sec:Tables"
35985 and in detail in the chapter
35992 \begin_inset space ~
36000 \begin_layout Subsection
36004 \begin_layout Standard
36010 Graphics are described in section
36011 \begin_inset space ~
36015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36017 reference "sec:Graphics"
36024 \begin_layout Subsection
36028 \begin_layout Standard
36029 Inserts a URL as described in section
36030 \begin_inset space ~
36034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36036 reference "subsec:URLs"
36043 \begin_layout Subsection
36047 \begin_layout Standard
36048 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36049 \begin_inset space ~
36053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36055 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36062 \begin_layout Subsection
36066 \begin_layout Standard
36067 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36068 \begin_inset space ~
36072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36074 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36081 \begin_layout Subsection
36085 \begin_layout Standard
36086 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36087 \begin_inset space ~
36091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36093 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36100 \begin_layout Subsection
36104 \begin_layout Standard
36105 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36106 title or caption of a float.
36107 Inserts a short title as described in section
36108 \begin_inset space ~
36112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36114 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36121 \begin_layout Subsection
36126 \begin_layout Standard
36127 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36128 Code box as described in section
36129 \begin_inset space ~
36133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36135 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36142 \begin_layout Subsection
36144 \begin_inset Index idx
36147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36158 \begin_layout Standard
36159 Inserts a program listings box.
36160 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36162 Program Code Listings
36167 \begin_inset space ~
36175 \begin_layout Subsection
36179 \begin_layout Standard
36180 Inserts the actual date.
36181 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36185 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36193 \begin_inset space ~
36201 \begin_layout Subsection
36205 \begin_layout Standard
36206 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36207 \begin_inset space ~
36211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36213 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36220 \begin_layout Section
36222 \begin_inset Index idx
36225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36236 \begin_layout Standard
36237 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36241 of the current document.
36242 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36245 \begin_layout Subsection
36249 \begin_layout Standard
36250 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36251 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36252 to jump, for example, between section
36253 \begin_inset space ~
36257 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36258 \begin_inset space ~
36261 2.5 and use the submenu
36264 \begin_inset space ~
36268 \begin_inset space ~
36275 \begin_inset space ~
36281 \begin_inset space ~
36285 \begin_inset space ~
36291 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36295 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36301 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36304 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36307 \begin_layout Standard
36308 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36312 \begin_inset space ~
36317 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36320 \begin_inset space ~
36325 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36328 \begin_layout Subsection
36329 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36332 \begin_layout Standard
36333 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36337 \begin_layout Subsection
36341 \begin_layout Standard
36342 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36343 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36344 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36348 \begin_inset space ~
36352 \begin_inset space ~
36360 \begin_layout Subsection
36364 \begin_layout Standard
36365 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36368 The \SpecialChar LyX
36369 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
36371 \begin_inset space ~
36379 \begin_inset space ~
36384 manual for a detailed description.
36387 \begin_layout Section
36389 \begin_inset Index idx
36392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36403 \begin_layout Subsection
36407 \begin_layout Standard
36408 Change Tracking is described in section
36409 \begin_inset space ~
36413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36415 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36422 \begin_layout Subsection
36426 \begin_layout Standard
36427 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
36428 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
36429 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36431 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36432 to the clipboard or update the view.
36433 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36437 \begin_layout Subsection
36438 Start Appendix Here
36441 \begin_layout Standard
36442 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36443 as described in section
36444 \begin_inset space ~
36448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36450 reference "sec:Appendices"
36457 \begin_layout Subsection
36459 \begin_inset space ~
36465 \begin_layout Standard
36466 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36467 default output format for the document (menu
36469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36470 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36471 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36473 \begin_inset space ~
36477 \begin_inset space ~
36483 \begin_inset space ~
36487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36489 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36493 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
36496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36497 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36499 \begin_inset space ~
36502 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36504 \begin_inset space ~
36507 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36509 \begin_inset space ~
36513 \begin_inset space ~
36519 \begin_inset space ~
36523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36525 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36529 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36530 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36532 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36533 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36535 \begin_inset space ~
36538 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36540 \begin_inset space ~
36543 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36547 \begin_inset space ~
36551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36553 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36558 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
36559 when it is first configured.
36560 The default output format is
36563 \begin_inset space ~
36571 \begin_layout Subsection
36572 View (Other Formats)
36575 \begin_layout Standard
36576 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36577 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36578 actual document with an external program.
36579 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36580 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36581 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
36583 All possible formats are listed in section
36584 \begin_inset space ~
36588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36590 reference "subsec:Export"
36595 You should at least see the menu entry
36600 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36602 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
36604 \begin_inset space ~
36608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36610 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36615 \begin_inset Index idx
36618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36621 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
36630 \begin_layout Standard
36631 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
36632 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36634 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36635 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36640 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36642 \begin_inset space ~
36645 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36649 \begin_inset space ~
36653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36655 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36660 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
36661 when it is first configured.
36664 \begin_layout Subsection
36666 \begin_inset space ~
36672 \begin_layout Standard
36673 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
36674 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
36677 \begin_layout Subsection
36678 Update (Other Formats)
36681 \begin_layout Standard
36682 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
36683 your document without opening a new viewer window.
36686 \begin_layout Subsection
36687 View Master Document
36690 \begin_layout Standard
36691 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36707 \begin_inset space ~
36712 manual for more information on this topic).
36713 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
36714 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36722 \begin_inset space ~
36727 generates the output of the whole book, while
36731 will just output the chapter alone.
36734 \begin_layout Standard
36735 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36736 in the document settings (menu
36738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36739 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36740 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36742 \begin_inset space ~
36746 \begin_inset space ~
36752 \begin_inset space ~
36756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36758 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36762 ) or in the preferences (menu
36764 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36765 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36767 \begin_inset space ~
36770 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36772 \begin_inset space ~
36775 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36777 \begin_inset space ~
36781 \begin_inset space ~
36787 \begin_inset space ~
36791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36793 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36800 \begin_layout Subsection
36801 Update Master Document
36804 \begin_layout Standard
36805 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36821 \begin_inset space ~
36826 manual for more information on this topic).
36827 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
36828 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
36831 \begin_layout Standard
36832 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36833 in the document settings (menu
36835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36836 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36837 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36839 \begin_inset space ~
36843 \begin_inset space ~
36849 \begin_inset space ~
36853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36855 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36859 ) or in the preferences (menu
36861 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36862 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36864 \begin_inset space ~
36867 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36869 \begin_inset space ~
36872 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36884 \begin_inset space ~
36888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36890 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36897 \begin_layout Subsection
36899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36901 name "subsec:Compressed"
36908 \begin_layout Standard
36909 Un/compresses the current document.
36910 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
36911 compression (see the
36913 Additional Features
36915 manual for details).
36918 \begin_layout Subsection
36922 \begin_layout Standard
36923 The document settings are described in appendix
36924 \begin_inset space ~
36928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36930 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
36937 \begin_layout Section
36939 \begin_inset Index idx
36942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36953 \begin_layout Subsection
36957 \begin_layout Standard
36958 Spell checking is explained in section
36959 \begin_inset space ~
36963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36965 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
36972 \begin_layout Subsection
36976 \begin_layout Standard
36977 The thesaurus is described in section
36978 \begin_inset space ~
36982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36984 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
36991 \begin_layout Subsection
36993 \begin_inset Index idx
36996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37005 \begin_inset Index idx
37008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37019 \begin_layout Standard
37020 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37021 the highlighted document part.
37024 \begin_layout Subsection
37026 \begin_inset Index idx
37029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37032 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37041 \begin_layout Standard
37042 Generates with the help of the program
37044 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37047 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37048 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37049 This feature is not available on Windows.
37052 \begin_layout Subsection
37054 \begin_inset Index idx
37057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37069 \begin_layout Standard
37070 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37075 \begin_inset space ~
37080 to see the full filename paths.
37083 \begin_layout Subsection
37085 \begin_inset Index idx
37088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37099 \begin_layout Standard
37100 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37101 files as described in section
37102 \begin_inset space ~
37106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37108 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37115 \begin_layout Subsection
37117 \begin_inset Index idx
37120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37135 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37153 \begin_inset Index idx
37156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37159 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37168 \begin_layout Standard
37169 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
37170 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
37171 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37172 -packages and programs it needs; see
37174 \begin_inset space ~
37178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37180 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37187 \begin_layout Subsection
37191 \begin_layout Standard
37196 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37197 \begin_inset space ~
37201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37203 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37210 \begin_layout Section
37212 \begin_inset Index idx
37215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37226 \begin_layout Standard
37227 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
37228 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
37230 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37234 \begin_layout Standard
37239 \begin_inset space ~
37244 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
37245 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37246 packages and classes found
37247 by \SpecialChar LyX
37249 \begin_inset space ~
37253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37255 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37262 \begin_layout Standard
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37271 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
37276 \begin_layout Section
37278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37280 name "sec:Toolbars"
37287 \begin_layout Standard
37288 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37289 \begin_inset space ~
37293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37295 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
37302 \begin_layout Standard
37303 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37304 This is described in the
37306 Additional Features
37311 \begin_layout Subsection
37313 \begin_inset Index idx
37316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37327 \begin_layout Standard
37328 \begin_inset Graphics
37329 filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37337 \begin_layout Standard
37338 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37344 \begin_layout Standard
37345 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37362 \begin_inset Note Note
37365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37368 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37373 manual for more information.
37381 \begin_layout Standard
37382 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37388 \begin_layout Standard
37389 \begin_inset Tabular
37390 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37391 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37392 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37399 \begin_inset Graphics
37400 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37414 pull-down box for the environments
37427 \begin_layout Standard
37428 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37434 \begin_layout Standard
37436 \begin_inset Tabular
37437 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37438 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37439 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37440 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37464 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37494 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37501 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37524 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37540 arg "dialog-show print"
37548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37554 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37561 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37570 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37584 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37614 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37621 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37644 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37674 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37734 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37750 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37764 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37783 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37790 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37804 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37832 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
37840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37846 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37847 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
37854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37875 Emphasize text, function of the
37877 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37879 \begin_inset space ~
37882 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37912 Set text to noun style, function of the
37914 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37916 \begin_inset space ~
37919 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37937 arg "textstyle-apply"
37945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37949 Format text using the current settings in the
37951 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37953 \begin_inset space ~
37956 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37989 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
37991 \begin_inset space ~
38000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38009 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38023 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38030 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38037 arg "tabular-insert"
38045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38051 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38058 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38067 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38079 Toggle outline window on/off,
38081 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38088 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38097 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38109 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38124 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38136 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38149 \begin_layout Subsection
38151 \begin_inset Index idx
38154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38165 \begin_layout Standard
38166 \begin_inset Graphics
38167 filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38175 \begin_layout Standard
38176 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38183 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38187 \begin_layout Standard
38188 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38194 \begin_layout Standard
38195 \begin_inset Tabular
38196 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38197 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38198 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38199 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38227 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38236 arg "layout Enumerate"
38244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38263 arg "layout Itemize"
38271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38317 arg "layout Description"
38325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38344 arg "depth-increment"
38352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38358 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38360 \begin_inset space ~
38364 \begin_inset space ~
38373 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38382 arg "depth-decrement"
38390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38396 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38398 \begin_inset space ~
38402 \begin_inset space ~
38411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38420 arg "float-insert figure"
38428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38434 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38435 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
38442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38451 arg "float-insert table"
38459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38466 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
38473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38512 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38542 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38588 \begin_inset space ~
38597 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38606 arg "nomencl-insert"
38614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38620 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38622 \begin_inset space ~
38631 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38640 arg "footnote-insert"
38648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38654 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38661 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38670 arg "marginalnote-insert"
38678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38686 \begin_inset space ~
38695 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38719 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38721 \begin_inset space ~
38730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38739 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38753 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38813 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38815 \begin_inset space ~
38824 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38833 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
38841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38848 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38864 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
38872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38879 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38881 \begin_inset space ~
38890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38899 arg "dialog-show character"
38907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38913 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38915 \begin_inset space ~
38918 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38934 arg "layout-paragraph"
38942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38948 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38950 \begin_inset space ~
38959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38968 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38982 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38996 \begin_layout Subsection
38997 View/Update Toolbar
38998 \begin_inset Index idx
39001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39004 Toolbar ! View / Update
39012 \begin_layout Standard
39013 \begin_inset Graphics
39014 filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39021 \begin_layout Standard
39022 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39028 \begin_layout Standard
39029 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39033 \begin_layout Standard
39034 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39040 \begin_layout Standard
39041 \begin_inset Tabular
39042 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39043 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39044 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39045 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39069 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39085 arg "buffer-update"
39093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39115 arg "master-buffer-view"
39123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39131 \begin_inset space ~
39140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39149 arg "master-buffer-update"
39157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39163 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39178 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39187 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39201 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39202 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39203 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39204 Synchronize with Output
39210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39215 \begin_inset Graphics
39216 filename ../../images/view-others.svgz
39218 groupId toolbarbuttons
39229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39236 View (Other Formats)
39242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39247 \begin_inset Graphics
39248 filename ../../images/update-others.svgz
39250 groupId toolbarbuttons
39259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39266 Update (Other Formats)
39279 \begin_layout Standard
39280 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39284 \begin_layout Subsection
39288 \begin_layout Standard
39289 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39290 \begin_inset space ~
39294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39296 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39300 , the table toolbar
39301 \begin_inset Index idx
39304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39315 \begin_inset space ~
39320 manual and the math macro toolbar
39321 \begin_inset Index idx
39324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39339 \begin_layout Chapter
39340 The Document Settings
39341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39343 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39348 \begin_inset Index idx
39351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39354 Document ! Settings
39362 \begin_layout Standard
39366 \begin_inset space ~
39371 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39372 is called with the menu
39374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39378 You can save your document settings as default with the
39380 Save as Document Defaults
39382 button in any dialog.
39383 This will create a template named
39387 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
39388 when you create a new document without
39392 \begin_layout Standard
39397 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39398 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39401 \begin_layout Standard
39402 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39403 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39404 to find the one you are looking for.
39405 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39406 the submenus of the dialog.
39408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39412 \begin_inset space \space{}
39416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39423 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39424 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39425 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39428 \begin_layout Section
39432 \begin_layout Standard
39433 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39435 Document classes are described in section
39436 \begin_inset space ~
39440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39442 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39450 \begin_layout Standard
39454 \begin_inset space ~
39459 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
39464 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
39465 as a layout for a document class.
39466 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39468 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39477 \begin_layout Standard
39478 Some classes use special class options by default.
39479 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39483 and you can decide to use them or not.
39484 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39485 recommended you leave them untouched.
39490 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39491 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39496 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39498 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39504 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39505 \begin_inset Newline newline
39510 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39513 \begin_inset Newline newline
39516 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39517 distribution, see section
39522 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39524 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39536 \begin_layout Standard
39541 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39542 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
39543 in the background if the child document
39544 is opened without its master.
39545 This way child documents are always compilable.
39546 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39553 \begin_inset space ~
39561 \begin_layout Standard
39562 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39573 \begin_inset Index idx
39576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39580 -packages ! prettyref
39586 \begin_inset Index idx
39589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39593 -packages ! refstyle
39598 for cross-references, see section
39599 \begin_inset space ~
39603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39605 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39612 \begin_layout Section
39616 \begin_layout Standard
39617 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39618 Please refer to the section
39621 \begin_inset space ~
39629 \begin_inset space ~
39634 manual for details.
39637 \begin_layout Section
39641 \begin_layout Standard
39642 Modules are explained in section
39643 \begin_inset space ~
39647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39649 reference "subsec:Modules"
39656 \begin_layout Section
39660 \begin_layout Standard
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39668 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
39675 \begin_layout Section
39679 \begin_layout Standard
39680 The document font settings are described in section
39681 \begin_inset space ~
39685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39687 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
39694 \begin_layout Section
39698 \begin_layout Standard
39699 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39716 and whether it should be a
39719 \begin_inset space ~
39724 can also be specified here.
39727 \begin_layout Standard
39728 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
39729 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
39730 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
39732 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
39735 \begin_layout Standard
39738 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
39741 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
39742 justifies the text on screen.
39743 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
39747 \begin_layout Section
39751 \begin_layout Standard
39752 This dialog is described in sections
39753 \begin_inset space ~
39757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39759 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
39764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39766 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
39773 \begin_layout Section
39777 \begin_layout Standard
39778 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
39779 \begin_inset space ~
39783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39785 reference "subsec:Margins"
39792 \begin_layout Section
39794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39796 name "sec:Language-encodings"
39801 \begin_inset Index idx
39804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39807 Language ! Encoding
39815 \begin_layout Standard
39816 The document language and quote styles are set here.
39817 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
39818 (the \SpecialChar LyX
39820 is always encoded in utf8).
39821 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39822 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
39823 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39824 -command is not known for
39825 a particular character).
39828 \begin_layout Standard
39829 If you use the option
39834 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
39835 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
39836 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39838 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
39839 exactly one encoding.
39840 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
39843 \begin_layout Standard
39845 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
39846 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
39847 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39848 installation supports Unicode), choose
39849 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
39850 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
39851 is quite incomplete, so
39852 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
39857 (when \SpecialChar LyX
39858 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
39859 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
39860 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
39861 -commands is not used, because all
39862 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
39863 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
39864 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39865 , two new alternative engines
39866 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
39868 Both engines support Unicode natively.
39870 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
39873 \begin_inset space ~
39881 \begin_inset space ~
39889 \begin_inset space ~
39895 \begin_inset space ~
39899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39901 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39906 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
39910 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
39913 \begin_layout Standard
39917 \begin_inset space ~
39922 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39923 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
39925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39933 The possible settings are:
39936 \begin_layout Description
39937 Default uses the language package that is selected in
39939 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39940 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39944 \begin_inset space ~
39948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39950 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
39957 \begin_layout Description
39958 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
39959 format you will use.
39960 In many cases this will be
39965 \begin_inset Index idx
39968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39978 If the newer package
39983 \begin_inset Index idx
39986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39990 -packages ! polyglossia
39995 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
39996 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39997 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
39999 this package will be used instead of
40006 \begin_layout Description
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40019 would be more appropriate.
40022 \begin_layout Description
40023 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40024 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40028 (for German texts), type in
40031 \begin_inset Newline newline
40036 usepackage{ngerman}
40039 \begin_layout Description
40040 None will not use a language package.
40041 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40044 \begin_layout Standard
40045 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40048 \begin_layout Description
40050 \begin_inset space ~
40054 \begin_inset space ~
40058 \begin_inset space ~
40065 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40071 \begin_inset Index idx
40074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40078 -packages ! inputenc
40084 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40085 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40086 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40090 \begin_layout Description
40091 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40093 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40094 commands, which may result in a big
40095 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40096 -commands are needed.
40099 \begin_layout Description
40101 \begin_inset space ~
40105 \begin_inset space ~
40108 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40111 \begin_layout Description
40113 \begin_inset space ~
40117 \begin_inset space ~
40120 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40123 \begin_layout Description
40125 \begin_inset space ~
40128 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40131 \begin_layout Description
40133 \begin_inset space ~
40137 \begin_inset space ~
40140 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40141 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40144 \begin_layout Description
40146 \begin_inset space ~
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40153 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40157 \begin_layout Description
40159 \begin_inset space ~
40163 \begin_inset space ~
40166 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40167 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40170 \begin_layout Description
40172 \begin_inset space ~
40176 \begin_inset space ~
40180 \begin_inset space ~
40183 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40190 \begin_layout Description
40192 \begin_inset space ~
40196 \begin_inset space ~
40200 \begin_inset space ~
40203 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40204 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40207 \begin_layout Description
40209 \begin_inset space ~
40213 \begin_inset space ~
40216 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40217 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40218 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40219 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40220 \begin_inset space ~
40224 \begin_inset space ~
40230 \begin_layout Description
40232 \begin_inset space ~
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40239 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40240 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40241 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40243 should try to use the encoding Unicode
40244 \begin_inset space ~
40248 \begin_inset space ~
40254 \begin_layout Description
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40263 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40266 \begin_layout Description
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40272 \begin_inset space ~
40275 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40278 \begin_layout Description
40280 \begin_inset space ~
40284 \begin_inset space ~
40287 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40290 \begin_layout Description
40292 \begin_inset space ~
40295 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40298 \begin_layout Description
40300 \begin_inset space ~
40303 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40306 \begin_layout Description
40308 \begin_inset space ~
40312 \begin_inset space ~
40315 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40318 \begin_layout Description
40320 \begin_inset space ~
40324 \begin_inset space ~
40330 \begin_layout Description
40332 \begin_inset space ~
40336 \begin_inset space ~
40339 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40342 \begin_layout Description
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40354 \begin_layout Description
40356 \begin_inset space ~
40360 \begin_inset space ~
40363 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40369 \begin_inset Index idx
40372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40381 , when using this, set the document language to
40386 \begin_layout Description
40388 \begin_inset space ~
40392 \begin_inset space ~
40395 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40400 , when using this, set the document language to
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40409 \begin_layout Description
40411 \begin_inset space ~
40415 \begin_inset space ~
40418 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40424 \begin_inset Index idx
40427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40431 -packages ! japanese
40436 , when using this, set the document language to
40441 \begin_layout Description
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40447 \begin_inset space ~
40450 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40455 , when using this, set the document language to
40460 \begin_layout Description
40462 \begin_inset space ~
40466 \begin_inset space ~
40469 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40474 , when using this, set the document language to
40479 \begin_layout Description
40481 \begin_inset space ~
40484 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40487 \begin_layout Description
40489 \begin_inset space ~
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40497 \begin_inset space ~
40500 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40503 \begin_layout Description
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40509 \begin_inset space ~
40513 \begin_inset space ~
40516 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40517 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40518 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40521 \begin_layout Description
40523 \begin_inset space ~
40527 \begin_inset space ~
40533 \begin_layout Description
40535 \begin_inset space ~
40539 \begin_inset space ~
40542 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40543 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40546 \begin_layout Description
40548 \begin_inset space ~
40552 \begin_inset space ~
40555 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40561 \begin_inset Index idx
40564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40573 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40576 \begin_layout Description
40578 \begin_inset space ~
40582 \begin_inset space ~
40585 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40592 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40595 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40602 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40603 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40605 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40608 \begin_layout Description
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40614 \begin_inset space ~
40617 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40623 \begin_inset Index idx
40626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40635 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40638 \begin_layout Description
40640 \begin_inset space ~
40643 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40649 \begin_inset Index idx
40652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40656 -packages ! inputenc
40662 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40666 \begin_layout Description
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40672 \begin_inset space ~
40676 \begin_inset space ~
40679 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40680 \begin_inset space ~
40686 \begin_layout Description
40688 \begin_inset space ~
40692 \begin_inset space ~
40696 \begin_inset space ~
40699 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
40700 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
40701 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
40705 \begin_layout Description
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40711 \begin_inset space ~
40715 \begin_inset space ~
40718 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
40719 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
40722 \begin_layout Section
40724 \begin_inset Index idx
40727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40736 \begin_inset Index idx
40739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40748 \begin_inset Index idx
40751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40754 Color ! Shaded boxes
40760 \begin_inset Index idx
40763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40766 Color ! Greyed-out notes
40774 \begin_layout Standard
40775 Here you can alter the font color for the
40779 (default: black), for
40782 \begin_inset space ~
40787 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
40791 (default: white) and for
40794 \begin_inset space ~
40804 sets the color back to the default.
40807 \begin_layout Standard
40808 Clicking any button showing
40816 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
40817 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
40818 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
40819 later more quickly.
40822 \begin_layout Standard
40823 Note, if you change the
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40831 font color and use the option
40834 \begin_inset space ~
40839 in the document settings under
40842 \begin_inset space ~
40847 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
40848 \begin_inset space ~
40852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40854 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
40861 \begin_layout Standard
40862 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40868 \begin_layout Standard
40872 \begin_inset space ~
40881 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
40884 \begin_inset space ~
40887 Code after a forced page break:
40890 \begin_layout Itemize
40891 For the page color:
40892 \begin_inset Newline newline
40899 pagecolor{color name}
40902 \begin_layout Itemize
40903 For the text color:
40904 \begin_inset Newline newline
40914 \begin_layout Standard
40915 You are restricted to one of
40951 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40964 \begin_inset Newline newline
40967 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
40968 names to refer to them:
40971 \begin_layout Itemize
40977 \begin_inset Newline newline
40982 page_backgroundcolor
40985 \begin_layout Itemize
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40995 \begin_inset Newline newline
41003 \begin_layout Itemize
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41013 \begin_inset Newline newline
41021 \begin_layout Itemize
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41031 \begin_inset Newline newline
41039 \begin_layout Standard
41040 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41043 \begin_inset space ~
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41059 \begin_layout Section
41063 \begin_layout Standard
41064 Here you can adjust the
41068 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41072 as described in section
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41079 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41086 \begin_layout Section
41090 \begin_layout Standard
41091 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41097 \begin_inset Index idx
41100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41114 \begin_inset Index idx
41117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41121 -packages ! jurabib
41129 Sectioned bibliography
41131 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41137 \begin_inset Index idx
41140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41144 -packages ! bibtopic
41149 and you can select a
41153 for the generation of the bibliography.
41154 For a further description see section
41155 \begin_inset space ~
41159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41161 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41168 \begin_layout Section
41172 \begin_layout Standard
41173 Here you can define the
41177 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41185 reference "sec:Index"
41192 \begin_layout Section
41196 \begin_layout Standard
41197 The PDF properties are explained in section
41198 \begin_inset space ~
41202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41204 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41211 \begin_layout Section
41215 \begin_layout Standard
41216 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
41217 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41223 \begin_inset Index idx
41226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41230 -packages ! amsmath
41240 \begin_inset Index idx
41243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41247 -packages ! amssymb
41257 \begin_inset Index idx
41260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41274 \begin_inset Index idx
41277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41291 \begin_inset Index idx
41294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41298 -packages ! mathdots
41308 \begin_inset Index idx
41311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41315 -packages ! mathtools
41325 \begin_inset Index idx
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41342 \begin_inset Index idx
41345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41349 -packages ! stackrel
41359 \begin_inset Index idx
41362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41366 -packages ! stmaryrd
41376 \begin_inset Index idx
41379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41383 -packages ! undertilde
41388 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41391 \begin_layout Description
41392 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
41393 -errors in formulas,
41394 ensure that you have this enabled.
41397 \begin_layout Description
41398 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
41399 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
41400 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
41404 \begin_layout Description
41405 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41420 \begin_layout Description
41421 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41424 \begin_inset space ~
41436 \begin_layout Description
41437 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41448 \begin_layout Description
41449 mathtools is used for the math commands
41485 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
41492 \begin_layout Description
41493 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41495 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41504 \begin_layout Description
41505 stackrel is used for the math command
41522 \begin_layout Description
41523 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
41526 \begin_layout Description
41527 undertilde is used for the math command
41535 Accents for one Character
41544 \begin_layout Section
41548 \begin_layout Standard
41549 The float placement options are described in the section
41552 \begin_inset space ~
41560 \begin_inset space ~
41568 \begin_layout Section
41572 \begin_layout Standard
41573 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41575 Program Code Listings
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41588 \begin_layout Section
41592 \begin_layout Standard
41593 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41601 set to be used and set the
41606 The itemize environment is described in section
41607 \begin_inset space ~
41611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41613 reference "sec:Itemize"
41620 \begin_layout Standard
41621 You can furthermore specify a
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41629 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41630 command of the desired character.
41631 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41638 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41644 \begin_inset space \space{}
41648 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41658 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41659 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41662 \begin_layout Standard
41663 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41671 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41672 -packages in the preamble (menu
41675 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41676 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41679 \begin_inset space ~
41685 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41689 usepackage{textcomp}
41692 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41696 usepackage{amssymb}
41706 \begin_layout Section
41710 \begin_layout Standard
41711 Branches are described in section
41712 \begin_inset space ~
41716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41718 reference "sec:Branches"
41725 \begin_layout Section
41727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41729 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41736 \begin_layout Standard
41737 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41740 \begin_layout Description
41742 \begin_inset space ~
41746 \begin_inset space ~
41749 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41769 View Master Document
41770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41777 Update Master Document
41778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41785 menu or the toolbar.
41786 The default is set in
41788 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41789 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41791 \begin_inset space ~
41794 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41798 \begin_inset space ~
41802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41804 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41811 \begin_layout Description
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41820 Output settings for the menu
41822 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41824 \begin_inset space ~
41830 For a detailed description see section
41832 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41837 \begin_inset space ~
41845 \begin_layout Description
41847 \begin_inset space ~
41851 \begin_inset space ~
41854 Options offers settings for the export format
41862 \begin_inset space ~
41867 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41868 \begin_inset space ~
41871 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41875 \begin_inset space ~
41880 settings are described in detail in section
41882 Math Output in XHTML
41887 \begin_inset space ~
41896 \begin_inset space ~
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41905 is used for the size of equations in the output.
41908 \begin_layout Section
41912 \begin_layout Standard
41913 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41915 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
41917 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41919 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
41923 \begin_layout Standard
41924 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41925 -syntax is given in section
41926 \begin_inset space ~
41930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41932 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41939 \begin_layout Chapter
41940 The Preferences Dialog
41941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41943 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41948 \begin_inset Index idx
41951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41962 \begin_layout Standard
41963 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
41965 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41969 It has the following submenus.
41972 \begin_layout Section
41976 \begin_layout Subsection
41980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41981 User Interface File
41982 \begin_inset Index idx
41985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41988 Customization ! of toolbars
41994 \begin_inset Index idx
41997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42000 Customization ! of menus
42008 \begin_layout Standard
42009 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42010 interface (ui) file.
42011 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42019 \begin_layout Description
42024 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42027 \begin_layout Description
42034 the menu entries in popup context menus
42037 \begin_layout Description
42042 specifies the toolbar buttons
42045 \begin_layout Standard
42046 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42047 and edit the entries.
42050 \begin_layout Standard
42051 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42063 entries must be finished with an explicit
42088 and in the case of the
42089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42101 The syntax for the entries is:
42104 \begin_layout Standard
42105 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42134 \begin_layout Standard
42136 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42139 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42140 -functions are listed in the menu
42142 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42144 \begin_inset space ~
42152 \begin_layout Standard
42153 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42159 \begin_layout Standard
42160 For example, assuming you use the menu
42162 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42165 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42169 \begin_layout Standard
42170 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42194 \begin_layout Standard
42196 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42211 to have the sixth bookmark.
42214 \begin_layout Standard
42218 \begin_inset space ~
42223 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42224 's toolbar buttons.
42225 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42226 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42229 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42240 \begin_layout Standard
42243 Enable tool tips in main work area
42245 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42249 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42253 \begin_layout Standard
42258 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
42259 should display in the menu
42261 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42263 \begin_inset space ~
42271 \begin_layout Subsection
42275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42279 \begin_layout Standard
42282 Restore window layouts and geometries
42285 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
42286 the last \SpecialChar LyX
42290 \begin_layout Standard
42293 Restore cursor positions
42295 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42299 \begin_layout Standard
42302 Load opened files from last session
42304 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
42308 \begin_layout Standard
42311 Clear all session information
42313 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
42314 sessions (cursor positions, names
42315 of last opened documents, etc.).
42318 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42322 name "subsec:Backup documents"
42327 \begin_inset Index idx
42330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42341 \begin_layout Standard
42344 Backup original documents when saving
42346 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42347 it was saved the last time.
42348 It is stored in the
42351 \begin_inset space ~
42357 \begin_inset space ~
42361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42363 reference "sec:Paths"
42367 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42370 \begin_inset space ~
42376 The backup file has the file extension
42377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42391 \begin_layout Standard
42394 Backup documents, every
42396 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42399 \begin_layout Standard
42402 Save documents compressed by default
42404 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
42405 \begin_inset space ~
42409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42411 reference "subsec:Compressed"
42416 This applies to newly created documents only.
42417 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
42420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42421 Windows & work area
42424 \begin_layout Standard
42427 Open documents in tabs
42429 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
42433 \begin_layout Standard
42438 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
42443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42451 reference "sec:Paths"
42455 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
42462 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
42463 documents will be opened in the same running instance
42464 of \SpecialChar LyX
42466 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
42467 instance is created for each file.
42470 \begin_layout Standard
42473 Single close-tab button
42475 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42478 \begin_inset Graphics
42479 filename ../../images/closetab.svgz
42486 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42487 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42490 \begin_layout Standard
42491 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42499 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
42500 before the change takes effect.
42508 \begin_layout Standard
42513 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
42515 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
42517 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42521 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
42522 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
42523 and only want to close the view in once instance.
42526 \begin_layout Subsection
42528 \begin_inset Index idx
42531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42542 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42549 \begin_layout Standard
42550 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
42554 \begin_layout Standard
42555 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42563 This section only deals with the fonts
42567 the \SpecialChar LyX
42569 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42573 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42584 \begin_layout Standard
42585 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
42602 (depends on the system) as its
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42621 \begin_layout Standard
42622 You can change the font size with the
42629 \begin_layout Standard
42634 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42639 points have the size of 1
42640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42650 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42655 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42660 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42661 \begin_inset space ~
42665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42667 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
42674 \begin_layout Standard
42677 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42679 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
42680 needs to redraw the screen less often.
42681 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42682 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42683 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42685 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42686 \begin_inset space ~
42692 \begin_layout Subsection
42694 \begin_inset Index idx
42697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42700 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
42707 \begin_inset Index idx
42710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42721 \begin_layout Standard
42722 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
42723 by choosing an item in the
42724 list and selecting the
42731 \begin_layout Standard
42732 By checking the option
42736 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42739 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42740 \begin_inset space ~
42744 \begin_inset space ~
42749 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42752 \begin_layout Subsection
42754 \begin_inset Index idx
42757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42768 \begin_layout Standard
42769 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
42773 \begin_layout Standard
42778 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42779 This feature is described in section
42780 \begin_inset space ~
42784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42786 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42793 \begin_layout Standard
42794 Checking the option
42797 \begin_inset space ~
42801 \begin_inset space ~
42805 \begin_inset space ~
42810 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42813 \begin_layout Section
42815 \begin_inset Index idx
42818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42829 \begin_layout Subsection
42833 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42837 \begin_layout Standard
42840 Cursor follows scrollbar
42842 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42846 \begin_layout Standard
42847 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42848 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42849 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42855 Scroll below end of document
42857 is self-explanatory.
42860 \begin_layout Standard
42861 In \SpecialChar LyX
42862 one can jump from word to word by pressing
42869 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42871 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42872 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42875 \begin_layout Standard
42878 Sort environments alphabetically
42880 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42883 \begin_layout Standard
42886 Group environments by their category
42888 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42891 \begin_layout Standard
42896 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42907 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42911 \begin_layout Standard
42912 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42917 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42918 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42922 \begin_layout Subsection
42924 \begin_inset Index idx
42927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42936 \begin_inset Index idx
42939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42942 Settings ! Shortcuts
42950 \begin_layout Standard
42955 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
42957 Several binding files are available, among them:
42960 \begin_layout Description
42961 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
42964 \begin_layout Description
42965 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
42977 \begin_layout Description
42978 mac.bind a set of bindings for
42981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42989 \begin_layout Standard
42990 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
42995 , and binding files for special languages.
42996 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
42997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43001 \begin_inset space \space{}
43005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43013 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43014 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43015 will try to use the appropriate binding
43019 \begin_layout Standard
43020 Some binding files, like
43024 , only have a limited scope.
43025 When looking at the end of the file
43029 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43032 \begin_layout Standard
43036 \begin_inset space ~
43040 \begin_inset space ~
43045 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43046 in the selected key binding file.
43049 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43053 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43058 \begin_inset Index idx
43061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43064 Key Bindings ! Editing
43072 \begin_layout Standard
43073 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43074 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43075 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43076 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43079 Show key-bindings containing
43082 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43083 Insert there for example as keyword
43084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43091 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43092 functions that contain
43093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43101 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43102 All \SpecialChar LyX
43103 functions are also listed in the file
43108 that you will find in the
43115 \begin_layout Standard
43116 For example, to add the shortcut
43124 , select the function and press the
43129 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43130 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43133 \begin_layout Standard
43134 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43135 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43137 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43138 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43140 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43145 \begin_layout Standard
43146 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43149 \begin_layout Standard
43150 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43152 The syntax of the entries is:
43155 \begin_layout Standard
43161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43180 \begin_layout Subsection
43182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43184 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43189 \begin_inset Index idx
43192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43201 \begin_inset Index idx
43204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43207 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43215 \begin_layout Standard
43216 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43217 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43218 provides keyboard maps.
43219 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43220 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43223 \begin_inset space ~
43227 \begin_inset space ~
43232 and select the keyboard map file named
43239 \begin_layout Standard
43248 keyboard map and, if you use the
43252 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43255 arg "keymap-primary"
43261 arg "keymap-secondary"
43264 respectively or toggle between them with
43267 arg "keymap-toggle"
43273 \begin_layout Standard
43274 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43282 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43291 \begin_layout Standard
43292 You can also specify the mouse
43294 Wheel scrolling speed
43297 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43309 \begin_inset space ~
43313 \begin_inset space ~
43318 you can select a key for zooming.
43319 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43322 \begin_layout Subsection
43326 \begin_layout Standard
43327 Input completion is described in section
43328 \begin_inset space ~
43332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43334 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43341 \begin_layout Section
43343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43350 \begin_inset Index idx
43353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43362 \begin_inset Index idx
43365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43376 \begin_layout Standard
43377 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
43378 are normally determined during
43380 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43383 \begin_layout Description
43385 \begin_inset space ~
43388 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
43389 's working directory.
43390 It is the default when you
43401 \begin_inset space ~
43409 \begin_layout Description
43411 \begin_inset space ~
43414 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43416 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43418 \begin_inset space ~
43422 \begin_inset space ~
43430 \begin_layout Description
43432 \begin_inset space ~
43435 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43441 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43445 \begin_inset Newline newline
43449 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43461 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
43462 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43470 \begin_layout Description
43472 \begin_inset space ~
43476 \begin_inset Index idx
43479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43487 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43488 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43489 \begin_inset space ~
43493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43495 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
43503 will be used to save the backups.
43504 \begin_inset Newline newline
43507 Backup files have the ending
43508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43518 \begin_layout Description
43520 \begin_inset space ~
43523 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43524 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
43526 \begin_inset Newline newline
43533 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43539 You can edit this file with the program
43548 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
43549 in its preferences under
43552 \begin_inset space ~
43558 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43563 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
43565 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43566 in your \SpecialChar LyX
43572 and \SpecialChar LyX
43573 need to be running the same time.
43574 \begin_inset Newline newline
43577 The pipe is also used for the
43582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43588 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
43593 \begin_inset Newline newline
43596 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
43597 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43598 \begin_inset Newline newline
43614 \begin_layout Description
43616 \begin_inset space ~
43619 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43622 \begin_layout Description
43624 \begin_inset space ~
43627 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43628 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43629 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43632 \begin_layout Description
43634 \begin_inset space ~
43637 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43643 You only need to specify it if you are using
43647 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43649 For \SpecialChar LyX
43654 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43658 \begin_layout Description
43660 \begin_inset space ~
43663 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43664 When \SpecialChar LyX
43665 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
43666 to find it on the system.
43667 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
43669 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43678 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43679 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43682 \begin_layout Description
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43687 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43688 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
43689 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
43690 code or in the document
43692 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43694 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43695 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43696 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43697 scanned for the input files.
43698 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43699 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
43701 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43702 compilation may fail for some documents.
43705 \begin_layout Section
43709 \begin_layout Standard
43710 Here you can insert your
43719 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43721 \begin_inset space ~
43725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43727 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43731 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43734 \begin_layout Section
43736 \begin_inset Index idx
43739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43742 Language ! Settings
43748 \begin_inset Index idx
43751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43754 Settings ! Language
43762 \begin_layout Subsection
43764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43766 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43773 \begin_layout Description
43775 \begin_inset space ~
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43782 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
43784 You can find its actual translation status here:
43785 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43787 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43794 \begin_layout Description
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43799 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
43800 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
43801 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43802 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43819 The most widespread language package is
43824 \begin_inset Index idx
43827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43836 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
43838 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43839 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43840 come with the alternative
43846 \begin_inset Index idx
43849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43853 -packages ! polyglossia
43858 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43859 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43865 The available selections are described in section
43866 \begin_inset space ~
43870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43872 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43879 \begin_layout Description
43881 \begin_inset space ~
43884 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43885 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
43886 you can here specify the command to start the package.
43887 An example is the start command
43893 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43895 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
43899 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43914 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43919 \begin_layout Description
43921 \begin_inset space ~
43929 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43930 command toggles the package on and off.
43933 \begin_layout Description
43935 \begin_inset space ~
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43942 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43946 \begin_layout Description
43948 \begin_inset space ~
43952 \begin_inset space ~
43955 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
43959 \begin_layout Description
43961 \begin_inset space ~
43965 \begin_inset space ~
43968 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43969 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43970 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
43972 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43979 \begin_layout Description
43981 \begin_inset space ~
43984 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43986 When this option is not set, the
43989 \begin_inset space ~
43994 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43996 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
43999 \begin_inset space ~
44007 \begin_layout Description
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44021 When it is not set, the
44024 \begin_inset space ~
44029 is set to the end of the document.
44032 \begin_layout Description
44034 \begin_inset space ~
44038 \begin_inset space ~
44041 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44042 language will be underlined in blue.
44045 \begin_layout Description
44047 \begin_inset space ~
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44054 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44055 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44058 \begin_layout Description
44060 \begin_inset space ~
44063 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44064 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44065 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44066 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44069 \begin_layout Subsection
44073 \begin_layout Standard
44074 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44075 \begin_inset space ~
44079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44081 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44088 \begin_layout Section
44092 \begin_layout Subsection
44096 \begin_layout Description
44098 \begin_inset space ~
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44105 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44108 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44109 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44111 \begin_inset space ~
44117 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44120 \begin_layout Description
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44126 \begin_inset Index idx
44129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44138 \begin_inset Index idx
44141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44144 Settings ! Date format
44149 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44150 \begin_inset Newline newline
44154 \begin_inset Flex URL
44157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44159 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44165 \begin_inset Newline newline
44168 For example the format
44169 \begin_inset Newline newline
44173 \begin_inset Newline newline
44176 prints the date as day/month/year.
44179 \begin_layout Description
44181 \begin_inset space ~
44185 \begin_inset space ~
44188 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44189 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44192 \begin_layout Description
44194 \begin_inset space ~
44197 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44199 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44201 \begin_inset space ~
44207 For a detailed description see section
44209 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44214 \begin_inset space ~
44222 \begin_layout Subsection
44224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44226 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44231 \begin_inset Index idx
44234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44237 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44246 \begin_layout Description
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44256 \begin_inset space ~
44259 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44264 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44285 are used for Cyrillic.
44286 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44299 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44301 sets up in the background.
44302 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44305 \begin_layout Description
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44311 \begin_inset space ~
44314 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44319 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44323 \begin_layout Description
44325 \begin_inset space ~
44329 \begin_inset space ~
44333 \begin_inset space ~
44337 \begin_inset space ~
44340 options They only have an effect when the program
44344 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44347 \begin_layout Standard
44348 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44349 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44350 manuals of the applications.
44353 \begin_layout Description
44355 \begin_inset space ~
44358 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44359 \begin_inset space ~
44363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44365 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
44372 \begin_layout Description
44374 \begin_inset space ~
44377 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44378 \begin_inset space ~
44382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44384 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
44391 \begin_layout Description
44393 \begin_inset space ~
44396 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44397 \begin_inset space ~
44401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44403 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
44410 \begin_layout Description
44412 \begin_inset space ~
44415 command Command for the program
44417 Check\SpecialChar TeX
44420 that is described in the section
44422 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
44427 Additional Features
44432 \begin_layout Standard
44433 There are additionally the following options:
44436 \begin_layout Description
44438 \begin_inset space ~
44442 \begin_inset space ~
44446 \begin_inset space ~
44450 \begin_inset space ~
44455 \begin_inset space ~
44458 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44476 to separate folders.
44477 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
44479 \begin_inset Index idx
44482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44491 \begin_inset Index idx
44494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44505 \begin_layout Description
44507 \begin_inset space ~
44511 \begin_inset space ~
44515 \begin_inset space ~
44519 \begin_inset space ~
44523 \begin_inset space ~
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44530 changes Removes all manually set
44536 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44537 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44539 \begin_inset space ~
44544 dialog when changing the document class.
44547 \begin_layout Section
44549 \begin_inset space ~
44553 \begin_inset Index idx
44556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44567 \begin_layout Subsection
44569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44571 name "subsec:Converters"
44576 \begin_inset Index idx
44579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44590 \begin_layout Standard
44591 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44592 from one format to another.
44593 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44594 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44601 \begin_inset space ~
44606 field and press the
44611 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44615 \begin_inset space ~
44620 drop-down list, modify the
44624 field and press the
44631 \begin_layout Standard
44634 Converter File Cache
44640 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44642 Maximum Age (in days
44645 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44646 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44649 \begin_layout Standard
44650 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44651 definition, is described in the section
44662 \begin_layout Subsection
44664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44666 name "sec:File-Formats"
44671 \begin_inset Index idx
44674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44683 \begin_inset Index idx
44686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44697 \begin_layout Standard
44698 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
44708 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44711 \begin_layout Standard
44712 You can also define the
44714 Default output format
44716 that is used when you use
44718 View, Update, View Master Document
44722 Update Master Document
44728 menu or the toolbar.
44731 \begin_layout Standard
44732 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44743 \begin_layout Standard
44744 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
44746 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44747 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44748 This is done by specifying a
44753 More about this is described in the section
44764 \begin_layout Chapter
44765 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
44767 \begin_inset Index idx
44770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44781 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44788 \begin_layout Standard
44790 \begin_inset space ~
44794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44796 reference "tab:Units"
44800 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
44801 and used in this documentation.
44804 \begin_layout Standard
44805 \begin_inset Float table
44811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44812 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44832 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44840 \begin_inset Tabular
44841 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
44842 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
44843 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44844 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44845 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45051 scaled point (65536
45052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45130 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45203 % of original image width
45208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45519 \begin_layout Chapter
45521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45523 name "chap:Credits"
45530 \begin_layout Standard
45531 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45532 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45535 \begin_layout Itemize
45538 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45541 \begin_layout Itemize
45547 \begin_layout Itemize
45553 \begin_layout Itemize
45559 \begin_layout Itemize
45565 \begin_layout Itemize
45571 \begin_layout Itemize
45577 \begin_layout Itemize
45583 \begin_layout Itemize
45586 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45589 \begin_layout Itemize
45595 \begin_layout Itemize
45601 \begin_layout Itemize
45607 \begin_layout Itemize
45613 \begin_layout Itemize
45619 \begin_layout Itemize
45625 \begin_layout Itemize
45631 \begin_layout Itemize
45637 \begin_layout Itemize
45638 The \SpecialChar LyX
45640 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45649 \begin_layout Standard
45650 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45653 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45660 \begin_layout Bibliography
45661 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45662 LatexCommand bibitem
45668 The \SpecialChar LyX
45670 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45673 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45678 \begin_inset Newline newline
45682 \begin_inset Flex URL
45685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45687 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45695 \begin_layout Bibliography
45696 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45697 LatexCommand bibitem
45698 key "latexcompanion"
45702 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45704 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
45705 Companion Second Edition.
45708 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45711 \begin_layout Bibliography
45712 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45713 LatexCommand bibitem
45718 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45721 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45725 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45728 \begin_layout Bibliography
45729 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45730 LatexCommand bibitem
45738 : A Document Preparation System.
45741 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45744 \begin_layout Bibliography
45745 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45746 LatexCommand bibitem
45755 The \SpecialChar TeX
45759 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45762 \begin_layout Bibliography
45763 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45764 LatexCommand bibitem
45769 The \SpecialChar TeX
45771 \begin_inset Newline newline
45775 \begin_inset Flex URL
45778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45780 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45788 \begin_layout Bibliography
45789 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45790 LatexCommand bibitem
45795 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
45797 \begin_inset Newline newline
45801 \begin_inset Flex URL
45804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45806 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45814 \begin_layout Bibliography
45815 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45816 LatexCommand bibitem
45822 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45824 name "Documentation"
45825 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45831 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45835 \begin_inset Newline newline
45839 \begin_inset Flex URL
45842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45852 \begin_layout Bibliography
45853 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45854 LatexCommand bibitem
45860 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45862 name "Documentation"
45863 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45867 how to use the program
45869 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45873 \begin_inset Newline newline
45877 \begin_inset Flex URL
45880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45882 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45890 \begin_layout Bibliography
45891 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45892 LatexCommand bibitem
45898 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45900 name "Documentation"
45901 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45910 \begin_inset Newline newline
45914 \begin_inset Flex URL
45917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45919 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45927 \begin_layout Bibliography
45928 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45929 LatexCommand bibitem
45930 key "makeindex-man"
45935 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45938 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
45947 \begin_inset Newline newline
45951 \begin_inset Flex URL
45954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45956 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
45964 \begin_layout Bibliography
45965 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45966 LatexCommand bibitem
45972 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45974 name "Documentation"
45975 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45984 \begin_inset Newline newline
45988 \begin_inset Flex URL
45991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45993 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46001 \begin_layout Bibliography
46002 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46003 LatexCommand bibitem
46009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46011 name "Documentation"
46012 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46016 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46018 \begin_inset Newline newline
46022 \begin_inset Flex URL
46025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46027 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46035 \begin_layout Bibliography
46036 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46037 LatexCommand bibitem
46043 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46045 name "Documentation"
46046 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46050 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46056 \begin_inset Index idx
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46063 -packages ! caption
46069 \begin_inset Newline newline
46073 \begin_inset Flex URL
46076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46086 \begin_layout Bibliography
46087 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46088 LatexCommand bibitem
46094 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46096 name "Documentation"
46097 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46101 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46107 \begin_inset Index idx
46110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46114 -packages ! enumitem
46120 \begin_inset Newline newline
46124 \begin_inset Flex URL
46127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46129 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46137 \begin_layout Bibliography
46138 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46139 LatexCommand bibitem
46145 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46147 name "Documentation"
46148 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46152 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46158 \begin_inset Index idx
46161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46165 -packages ! fancyhdr
46171 \begin_inset Newline newline
46175 \begin_inset Flex URL
46178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46180 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46188 \begin_layout Bibliography
46189 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46190 LatexCommand bibitem
46196 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46198 name "Documentation"
46199 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46203 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46209 \begin_inset Index idx
46212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46216 -packages ! hyperref
46222 \begin_inset Newline newline
46226 \begin_inset Flex URL
46229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46231 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46239 \begin_layout Bibliography
46240 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46241 LatexCommand bibitem
46247 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46249 name "Documentation"
46250 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46254 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46260 \begin_inset Index idx
46263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46267 -packages ! nomencl
46273 \begin_inset Newline newline
46277 \begin_inset Flex URL
46280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46282 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46290 \begin_layout Bibliography
46291 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46292 LatexCommand bibitem
46298 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46300 name "Documentation"
46301 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46305 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46311 \begin_inset Index idx
46314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46318 -packages ! prettyref
46324 \begin_inset Newline newline
46328 \begin_inset Flex URL
46331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46333 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46341 \begin_layout Bibliography
46342 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46343 LatexCommand bibitem
46349 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46351 name "Documentation"
46352 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46356 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46362 \begin_inset Index idx
46365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46369 -packages ! refstyle
46375 \begin_inset Newline newline
46379 \begin_inset Flex URL
46382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46384 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46392 \begin_layout Bibliography
46393 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46394 LatexCommand bibitem
46400 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46403 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46407 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46409 \begin_inset Newline newline
46413 \begin_inset Flex URL
46416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46418 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46426 \begin_layout Bibliography
46427 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46428 LatexCommand bibitem
46434 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46437 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46441 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46443 \begin_inset Newline newline
46447 \begin_inset Flex URL
46450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46452 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46460 \begin_layout Bibliography
46461 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46462 LatexCommand bibitem
46468 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46471 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46475 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46476 for Cyrillic languages:
46477 \begin_inset Newline newline
46481 \begin_inset Flex URL
46484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46486 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46494 \begin_layout Bibliography
46495 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46496 LatexCommand bibitem
46502 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46505 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46509 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46511 \begin_inset Newline newline
46515 \begin_inset Flex URL
46518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46520 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46528 \begin_layout Bibliography
46529 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46530 LatexCommand bibitem
46536 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46539 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46543 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46545 \begin_inset Newline newline
46549 \begin_inset Flex URL
46552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46554 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46562 \begin_layout Bibliography
46563 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46564 LatexCommand bibitem
46570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46573 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46577 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46579 \begin_inset Newline newline
46583 \begin_inset Flex URL
46586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46588 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46596 \begin_layout Bibliography
46597 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46598 LatexCommand bibitem
46604 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46607 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46611 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46613 \begin_inset Newline newline
46617 \begin_inset Flex URL
46620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46622 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46630 \begin_layout Bibliography
46631 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46632 LatexCommand bibitem
46638 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46641 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46645 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46647 \begin_inset Newline newline
46651 \begin_inset Flex URL
46654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46656 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46664 \begin_layout Bibliography
46665 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46666 LatexCommand bibitem
46672 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46675 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46679 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46681 \begin_inset Newline newline
46685 \begin_inset Flex URL
46688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46690 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46698 \begin_layout Bibliography
46699 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46700 LatexCommand bibitem
46706 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46709 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46713 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46715 \begin_inset Newline newline
46719 \begin_inset Flex URL
46722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46724 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46732 \begin_layout Bibliography
46733 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46734 LatexCommand bibitem
46740 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46743 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46747 about new features in
46753 \begin_inset Newline newline
46757 \begin_inset Flex URL
46760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46762 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46770 \begin_layout Standard
46771 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46805 \begin_inset Note Note
46808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46817 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46818 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46819 bibliography is the second one:
46827 \begin_layout Standard
46828 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46829 LatexCommand bibtex
46830 bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs"
46831 options "../biblio/alphadin"
46838 \begin_layout Standard
46839 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46843 \begin_layout Standard
46844 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46845 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46851 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46852 LatexCommand printindex